Skip to main content

Full text of "Introduction to Infectious and Parasitic Diseases: Including Their Cause and Manner of Transmission"

See other formats


Google 



This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 

to make the world's books discoverable online. 

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. 

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the 

publisher to a library and finally to you. 

Usage guidelines 

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the 
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 
We also ask that you: 

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of 
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe. 

About Google Book Search 

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers 
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 

at |http: //books .google .com/I 



'^iiiii T/o.n 




Satbacl) iS:olUge l.tbtars 



JARVIS FUND 

bequest of (500 from Mrs. Almiia Jarvis. to fulfil 1 

wishes or her hueband, Edwud Jaxvla, H.D. 

of Dorchester, Mass., of the 



^'t-^ 



r 



INFECTIOUS 
AND PARASITIC DISEASES 



LANGFELD 



"This kingdom (bacterial) is a veritable fairyland. Its 
inhabitants are more nimierous than the sands of the sea, 
and as varying in their functions as are the inhabitants of 
the animal and vegetable kingdom." ** Only a few of 
them work serious harm to man, and even the harm which 
these do is not out of harmony with nature as a whole. 
The world as we see it can be maintained only by a har- 
monious succession of life and death." (Flick, Consump- 
tion, a Curable and Preventible Disease.) 

"When we realize that the majority of all deaths is still 
from preventible causes, most of which are already quite 
familiar to us, it is manifest that this must be in a large 
measure due to an indifference on our part to put into 
practice even the knowledge which we already possess for 
their prevention." (Abbott, Hygiene of Transmissible 
Diseases.) 

"The belief is growing stronger that the commimicable 
diseases are more often spread through the intermediation 
of mild, latent and imrecognized cases than through the 
agency of fomites, that is, inanimate objects." (Rosenau, 
Disinfection and Disinfectants.) 



o 

INTRODUCTION TO 

INFECTIOUS AND 
PARASITIC DISEASES 



INCLUDING 

THEIR CAUSE AND 
MANNER OF TRANSMISSION 



BY 

MILLARD LANGFELD, A.B., M.B., (Johns Hopkins) 

Professor of Bacteriology and Clinical Medicine, John A. Creighton Med- 
ical College, Omaha; Visiting Physician, St. Joseph's and Douglas 
County Hospitals, and Bacteriologist, the Omaha City 

Board of Health. 



With an Introduction by Lewellys F. Barker, Professor of 
Medicine at the Johns Hopkins University 



WITH THIRTY-THREE ILLUSTRATIONS 



PHILADELPHIA 

P. BLAKISTON'S SON & CO. 

1012 WALNUT STREET 
1907 



I7l0v\x 



i 




^J'T 



B R A v< ' 




CopmoBT, 1907, By P. Blaxiston's Son & Co. 



i 



PHnUdby 

The Ma^le Press, 

York. Flu 



MICROFILMED 
AT HARVARD 



I ! 



To the 
memory of my beloved father 

'Daniel TanaM^ 

this book in grateful remembrance 
is dedicated 



PREFACE. 



Primarily this book was written for the use of nurses, 
in the belief that by broadening their comprehension of 
infectious and parasitic diseases it would materially 
assist them in performing their duties more inteUi- 
gently, and with greater satisfaction to themselves. 
Through the solicitations of several medical friends who 
kindly looked over my manuscript, and who were of 
the opinion that both physicians and students of med- 
icine would find as much to interest them in its pages 
as would nurses, the original design of the book was 
altered somewhat. It seemed to me that if in place 
of the conventional (seriatum) text-book consideration 
of the above diseases the fundamental principles which 
govern all were substituted, knowledge of wider utility 
would be acquired, and with less effort, because much 
imimportant detail could be avoided. It was my aim, 
also, by reflecting current medical thought to explain 
to nurses the reasons for performing many duties which 
they are merely taught to do. Then, since the trained 

nurse's position as medical assistant to the doctor and 

.. 

Vll 



PREFACE. 

as a sanitarian has developed into one of such extra- 
ordinary importance, specific information in regard 
to these offices was to be given a prominent place. 
For the same reasons, chapters on "Bacteriology," 
"Parasites," and "The Collection and Examination of 
Secretions and Excretions" were included in the plan. 
Withal, every effort was to be made to be lucid in style 
and simple in treatment. Of nursing, per se, I was 
not to treat. 

The present volume represents my efforts to embody 
the above ideas in a book. 

My obligation to various authors has been heavy, 
and I wish I could make suitable acknowledgment to 
every one upon whom I have drawn for material; 
but the character of the book obviously makes this 
impracticable. Nevertheless, to Professor Roger's 
"Introduction to the Study of Medicine" and "Infec- 
tious Diseases," to Dr. Abott's "Hygiene of Trans- 
missible Diseases," and also to Dr. Rosenau's "Dis- 
infection and Disinfectants," I feel reference should 
be made. Furthermore, I would be lacking in grati- 
tude did I not make acknowledgment to my alma 
mater, the Johns Hopkins Medical School; the book 
really owes its inception to the scientific spirit and 
inspiring personjility of its faculty. 

To have been a student there is a hfe-long pleasurable 
memory, and a distinction which I feel can be repaid 
only in small measure by describing my efforts as 



PREFACE. ix 

feeble amplifications of its teachings. Professor Barker 
was my first teacher in medicine, and to him I am 
indebted for much more than his graciousness in review- 
ing these pages and writing the introductory note. 

The only originality claimed is in the presentation 
of the subject matter. Save in a few instances, specu- 
lation has not been indulged in, and only accepted 
doctrines have been adhered to. 

Great pleasure was taken in the writing of these pages, 
although most of the work was done during moments 
snatched here and there between urgent duties; whether 
I was justified in my undertaking can only be told if 
others derive either pleasure or profit in their perusal. 

Millard Langfeld. 

203 McCague Bldg., Omaha, Neb. 
March 2$, 1907. 



INFECTIOUS 
AND PARASITIC DISEASES 



LANGFELD 



CONTENTS 



CHAPTER I: Causes of Disease i 

Health, i — Disease, i — Agents of disease, mechanical, 
physical, chemical, animate, 3 — ^Infectious agents, 5 — 
Parasite, 8 — Specific and non-specific infectious agents, 
9 — Specific and non-specific infectious diseases, 10 — 
Characteristics of infectious diseases, 12 — Local and gen- 
eral infections, 19 — Combined infections, 22 — Secondary 
infections, 23 — Self-limiting nature of infectious diseases, 
24 — Antibodies, 25 — Agglutinins, 27 — Opsonins, 27 — 
Complications, 32 — Terminal infections, 34 — Evolution 
of disease, 34 — Communicable diseases, 37. 

CHAPTER H: Bactemology 38 

Arts and industries, 39 — Saproph)rtes, 40 — Pathogenic and 
non-pathogenic bacteria, 41 — Size, 42 — Multiplication, 42 
— Shape, 43 — Grouping, 44 — Distribution, 45 — Specific 
and non-specific bacteria, 51 — Spores, 52 — Factors neces- 
sary for the growth of bacteria, 53 — Agents harmful to 
bacteria, 57 — Deodorant, 57 — ^Insecticides, 58. 

CHAPTER ni: Phenomena of Infection 66 

Infectious agents in disease, 68: Nimiber of bacteria in, 
68 — Portalsof entry, 69 — ^^rulence, 70 — Microbic associa- 
tion (symbiosis), 71 — Conve3^nce by insects, 72. The 
body in relation to infections, 73: Predisposition, 74 — 

xm 



i 



xiv CONTENTS. 

Heredity, 76 — Race, 76 — Family, 79 — ^Individual, 80 — 
Environment, 81 — Region, 81 — Climate, 81 — Ph3rsical 
conditions, 85 — Season, 90 — Fasting, poor food, etc., 90 
— Occupation, 92 — ^Age, 94. 

CHAPTER IV: Iotlammation 99 

Inflammation, 99 — Cardinal symptoms of inflammation, 
loi — Leucocytes, 102 — Chemotaxis, 103 — Phagocytosis, 
104 — Leucocytosis, 105 — Suppuration, 106 — Pyogenic 
bacteria, 107. 

CHAPTER V: Anhial Parasites 109 

Protozoa, 11 1 — AnuBba Dysenteric^, 112 — Trypanosoma 
Gantbiense, 113 — Dimi-Dum fever, 113 — Plasmodium 
Malaria, 113 — Nematodes, 116 — Guinea-worm, 116 — 
Filaria BancrofH, 118 — Filaria Loa, 120 — Trichiuris 
trichiura, 121 — StrongyloidesiniesHnalis, 122 — Trichinella 
Spiralis, 122 — Ascaris lumbricoides, 124 — Oxyuris ver- 
miculariSf 125 — Uncinaria duodenalis, 126. Flat worms, 
129: Trematodes, 129: — Paragonimus Wesiermanii, 130 
— Opisthorchis Sinensis, 131 — Fasciola hepatica, 132 — 
SchisU)somumh(emaU)bium, 132. Cestodes, 133: — Tcmia 
saginata, 136 — Tcmia Solium, 136 — Bothriocephalus lotus, 
137 — Dipylidium Caninum, 138 — Hymenolepsis nana, 
138. ^sceral cestodes, 139: — Cysticercus cMulosa, 139 
— Tcerm echinococcus, 140. Insects, 141: — Parasitic dip- 
tera, 141 — (Estrus kominis, 142 — Dermatobia cyanvoentris, 
143 — CompsomyiamaceUaria, 143 — SarcophagaCamaria, 
143 — Pulex irritans (flea), 144 — Sarcopsylla penetrans 
(sand-flea), 144 — Bed-bug, 144 — Lice, 145 — Ascaris 
scabiei (itch-mite), 148 — Leptus Autumnalis (harvest- 
mite), 149 — Ixodes Ricinus (wood-tick), 149. 



CONTENTS. XV 

CHAPTER VI: Avenues of Exir of Infectious Agents 

AND Parasites from the Body 151 

Expectoration and nasal secretions, 155 — Feces, 156 — 
Urine, 160 — Skin, 161 — Blood through bites of insects, 
162 — Suppurations, 164. 

CHAPTER VH: Portals of Entry of Infectious 

Agents and Parasites into the Body 166 

Through wounds of skin and mucous membranes, 173 — 
By mouth and nose through air, 173 — By mouth through 
food and water, 175 — By genito-urinary tract, 181 — By 
placenta, 182 — Cryptogenic (unknown entrance), 183. 

CHAPTER Vni: Portals of Entry and Avenues of 
Exit of Micro-organisms in the Various Diseases. 184 
Actinomycosis, 184 — Anthrax, 185 — Bubonic plague, 186 
— Epidemic cerebro-spinal meningitis, 188 — Chicken-pox 
(varicella), 188 — Cholera, 189 — Dengue, 190 — Diphtheria, 
190 — Dysentery (amoebic), 192 — Dysentery (bacillary), 
192 — Erysipelas, 193 — Glanders, 194 — Gonorrhoea, 195 — 
Hydrophobia, 196— Influenza, 197 — Leprosy, 197 — Ma- 
dura foot, 198 — Malarial fever, 198 — Measles, 199 — 
Mimips, 200 — Pneimionia, 200 — Relapsing fever, 201 — 
Rubella, 202 — Scarlet fever, 202 — Small-pox, 207 — Epi- 
demic stomatitis, 205 — Syphilis, 206 — Tetanus, 207 — 
Tuberculosis, 208 — Typhoid fever, 209 — Whooping- 
cough, 212 — Yellow fever, 212. 

CHAPTER IX: Disinfectants and Disinfection 214 

Purpose of, 214 — Heat, 216 — Gaseous disinfectants, 218 
— Chemical disinfectants, liquids, 219 — Bichloride of 
mercury, 221 — Formalin, 222 — Carbolic acid, 222 — 
Tricresol, 223 — Milk of lime, 224 — Chloride of lime, 224. 



XVI CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER X: Collection and Examination of Secre- 
tions AND Excretions aa6 

Sputum, 226 — Diphtheritic cultures, 230 — ^Vomit, 232 — 
Test-meals, 234 — Blood specimens, 236 — Typhoid fever 
(Widal) outfit, 236 — Malaxia, 238 — Pus and other dis- 
charges, 240 — Urine, 241 — Feces, 249. 

APPENDIX 353 

INDEX ass 



INFECTIOUS 
AND PARASITIC DISEASES 



CHAPTER I. 

CAUSES OF DISEASE. 

Since disease is a deviation from that state of the 
body which is called health, it is appropriate, before 
taking up the "causes of disease," to define, briefly, 
what health and disease are. 

Health may be defined as that condition 
Health, of the body in which all of its functions are 

normally performed, to the end, that a 
feeling of mental and bodily comfort is experienced. It 
is a nice balance, or equilibrium, maintained between 
our bodies and the surrounding world. Eating, drink- 
ing, and sleeping, work, play, and rest, are factors that 
should promote a general feeling of weU-being, that 
in turn manifests itself in the desire and ability to eat, 
drink, sleep, work, play, and rest, all normal functions 
which the healthy human being craves. 

Disease, on the other hand, is characterized 
Disease, by a rupture in the relationship of our 

bodies to our surroundings, which leads 
to disturbed functions, and to unusual subjective sen- 
sations and objective phenomena. Whatever breaks 



2 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

the harmony of health, in other words, whatever causes 
disease, always acts so as to destroy some tissue, or to 
interfere with the functions of some organ. The mod- 
em conception of the causation of disease no longer 
gives credence to the belief that its causes are novel 
and mysterioxis, but, on the contrary, from indisputable 
evidence, places them among the actual phenomena of 
the physical world. Nor does it admit the spontaneous 
development of disease in either the bom or the unborn, 
albeit obvious instances to the contrary, since in such 
cases some external agency has previously acted directly 
or indirectly (e.g., through a parent) as a first cause, 
and intermpted the orderly continuity of the normal 
functions. Therefore, no matter what the exciting 
cause of a disease may be, // invariably, and primarily, 
comes from withotU the body. 

When an extraneous cause acts injuriously upon a 
person, his organism does not remain passive, but 
reacts with all its might to counteract the cause and 
repair any defect the latter's presence has given rise to. 
This power of the body to protect itself lays in a defen- 
sive mechanism evolved during countless ages of suc- 
cessful eflForts to survive destruction against harmful 
influences in the universal struggle for life. So nicely 
is the body's mechanism of defense adjusted, that con- 
stant re-adjustments are made to passing dangers, 
under ordinary circumstances, without consciousness 
being disturbed. In this way equilibrium with the 



CAUSES OF DISEASE. j 

outside world is maintained. Should, however, a 
harmful influence be unusually strong, then the reac- 
tions of re-adjustment to which it gives rise are corre- 
spondingly vigorous and wide-spread, so that conscious- 
ness is disturbed, functions are corrupted, and most 
astonishing changes in the external appearance are 
observed. These phenomena of reaction are evidence 
of the battle that is being waged by the body against a 
harmful force, and collectively they constitute the 
symptoms of disease. All harmful influences are pro- 
vocative pf disease ; yet disease does not exist unless the 
reactions or s)niiptoms are suflSciently pronounced as to 
upset the orderly unconscious functioning of the body. 
Diseased states are also called morbid or pathological; 
wherefore morbific or pathological causes are those 
that bring about disease. The causes of disease are 
often spoken of as agents. We divide the agents of 
disease into four classes, mechanical, physical, chemical, 
and animate. 

A blow which breaks a bone, an obstruction 
Mechanical, to respiration due to a foreign body lodging 

in the larynx, a rupture of the abdominal 
wall that permits a loop of the intestines to protrude, 
are all instances of diseases due to mechanical agents. 

Similarly, alterations in the surrounding 
Physical. medium, as for example, ascending to 

great heights, or working at great depths 
imder pressure, produce respectively mountain-climbers' 



4 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

disease and divers' paralysis — two well-recognized 
aflFections, the result of physical agents. 

That diseases are often brought about 
Chemical through chemical agents scarcely needs 
Agents, illustration on account of the frequency 

of such cases being reported by the Press, 
and the familiarity of the average person with the 
dangerous character of many chemicals, notably the 
poisons. Ptomain poisoning, which comes from eating 
various foods that have undergone a peculiar decom- 
position; arsenical poisoning, numerous cases of which 
were reported in London, England, a few years ago, 
in which the arsenic was traced to the glucose in beer; 
and painters' colic, or lead colic, a disease common in 
those whose occupations bring them into close contact 
with lead, are examples of diseases of chemic origin. 
Indeed, among the causes of disease, the chemical 
agents are by far the most numerous and the most 
important, in as much as the majority of diseased 
states are fundamentally, or coincidentally, of a chem- 
ical nature. Most of the physical and mechanical 
agencies, through the injuries they inflict on tissues, 
are thereby transformed into chemical irritants, since 
the resulting reactions follow largely as a result of the 
absorption of dead and useless material. For example : 
A person is severely burned, yet survives three days. 
He does not die as a direct result of the physical agent, 
fire, but from poisoning in one of the two ways ; namely, 



CAUSES OF DISEASE. 5 

either so large a surface of the cuticle was destroyed 
that the respiratory and excretory functions of the skin 
were interrupted, so that poisoning followed the reten- 
tion of products which should have been excreted from 
the body; or, poisoning resulted from absorption of the 
detrimental products into which the skin was converted 
by the fire. 

Similarly, in diseases the result of mechanical forces, 
while the earliest phenomena are the direct result of 
the injury (shock, for example), the later reactions 
follow as a sequel to the absorption of dead tissues 
and inflammatory products. Indeed, reconstruction of 
tissues, e.g., bone, etc., is initiated by these very prod- 
ucts being absorbed, and, thereby reflexly irritating 
into action those tissues and functions that bring about 
repair. 

The fourth group into which we divide 

Animate the agents of disease is the animate. 

Agents. Animate agents comprise two classes, 

parasites and infectious agents, both of 

which may be foimd among either the animal or 

vegetable kingdom. 

Before the dawn of bacteriology, phys- 
Inpectious icians had already applied the term, infec- 
Agents. tious, to diseases that, symptomatically, 

conformed to a certain type and were con- 
veyed through the air. Early in their career, bacteriol- 



6 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

ogists discovered that a number of the infectious 
diseases were due to bacteria and, rather hastily, it 
must be confessed, concluded that all of this class had 
a similar origin. So they described an infectious 
disease as "a morbid or diseased state of the body due 
to the invasion and growth of bacteria." Somewhat 
later it was seen that they had gone too far in formulat- 
ing this definition for infectious diseases, because a 
certain number were discovered which owe their origin 
to animate agents that are not bacteria, namely, to 
moulds and protozoa.* 

Hence it has followed that the designation "infectious 
disease" is restricted in its application to diseases which 
conform to a certain type, and "infectious agent" to 
a living organism,! microscopic in size, that is capable 
of producing an infectious disease. So far as we know, 
only three types of organisms produce infectious diseases, 
namely, bacteria, moulds and protozoa, certain species 
of each comprising the infectious agents. At present 
bacteria constitute the vast majority, but it is fast 

* Protozoa (literally, first animal) are the simplest organisms which 
dearly belong to the animal kingdom. The characteristic which dis- 
tinguishes them from all other groups of animals is the fact that each 
protozoan consists of a single cell. 

t Organism — composed of organs functionally necessary for the ex- 
istence of the individual or race. Although unicellular plants and 
animals have no organs, yet, since they perform functions analogous to 
those of the higher forms of living matter, we are correct in considering 
them organisms. 



CAUSES OF DISEASE. 7 

becoming evident that both protozoa and moulds are 
of abnost, if not of equal importance, as causative 
factors in infectious diseases; and that besides these, 
there are other microscopic and ultra-microscopic 
forms of life, not included in the three groups, that are 
playing a similar r61e. For these reasons we conclude 
that the only defensible definition of an infectious agent 
is that it is either an animal or vegetable organism, 
microscopic in size, which produces an infectious 
disease. It will be observed, from the point of view 
of this definition, that we classify the organisms that 
produce infectious diseases not by their place in the 
animal or vegetable kingdom, but by the eflFects they 
produce in the living body. 

The animate agents, it will be remembered, we 
divided into two classes, parasites, and infectious agents. 
The designations have reference both to the manner 
in which the agents live upon the body, and the phenom- 
ena their presence give rise to; their place in either 
animal or vegetable kingdom is again disregarded. 
The mode of action of the infectious agent is character- 
istic, and markedly diflFerent from that of the parasite. 
When it enters a living body, it aims directly at the 
destruction of the latter. It multiplies rapidly, tends 
to scatter its broods throughout the tissues, and all 
the while gives oflF the most powerful poisons known. 
This agent is wickedly implacable, neither giving nor 
asking quarter. The battle that it wages with the body 



8 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

can terminate only by the destruction of one of the 
combatants. 

In contrast to this monster evil is the lesser, 
Parasite, the parasite. A parasite is an organism 

that lives within or upon another organism 
called the host. The parasite's purpose is an easy 
living at the expense of the host. It subtly recognizes 
that it is to its interest not to inflict too great an injury. 
If perchance it causes the death of the host, it is an 
accident. It seldom invades the body generally. 
From the foregoing is seen the reason for drawing a 
distinction between parasites and infectious agents 
based upon their mode of action and the effects they 
produce. It should be remembered, however, that 
parasites and infectious agents are not necessarily 
represented by distinct organisms. Indeed, the same 
microbe may live upon our bodies, or within its cavities, 
at one time as a parasite, and at another time be the 
cause of an infectious disease. The germ of pneu- 
monia is a constant inhabitant of almost everyone's 
mouth, leading there a harmless parasitic existence, 
yet let the vital powers be reduced through fatigue, 
exposure, or cold, and it becomes an infectious agent 
through the disease (pneumonia) which it provokes. 
The difference between a germ that is at one time a 
parasite, and at another time an infectious agent, 
depends in the latter case upon the power it has of 
producing its specific poison, and also upon its chance 



CAUSES OF DISEASE. 9 

of finding lodgment in an appropriate situation within 
the body * 

Infectious agents are divided into those 
Specific and that are specific, and those that are non- 
Non-specific specific. By specific is understood an 
Infectious organism that always provokes the same 
Agents. disease; at the same time it implies that 

it is the only exciting cause of that disease. 
The microbes which cause typhoid fever, diphtheria, 
plague, etc., are specific agents, because they are the 
only germs, respectively, that can give rise to these 
diseases. 

A non-specific agent is an organism whose entrance 
into the body is not necessarily followed by the same 
disease, in fact, its eflFects are particularly characterized 
by their dissimilarity; besides, its action is duplicated 
by other non-specific agents. The streptococcus 
pyogenes is a most excellent example of a non-specific 
agent. The following are some of the diseases it 
provokes: Erysipelas, puerperal fever (child-bed fever), 
tonsillitis, peritonitis, abscess, etc., all affections that 
exhibit a widely divergent s)niiptomatology, and each one 
of which may result from entrance into the body of 
an entirely different species of bacterium. 

*From one view-point, all infectious agents are parasites, just as we 
will see later they may also be saprophytes. But the true parasite is 
never an infectious agent. 



lo INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

Infectious diseases are divided into the 
Specific and specific and the non-specific according 
Non-specific as they result from a specific or non- 
Infectious specific agent. There are some infectious 
Diseases. diseases, however, in which the etiological 

factor is not known, yet they are classed 
with the specific maladies. This is done because the 
s)niiptomatology of each is characteristic, and because 
any one of them in one individual never gives rise in 
another, who may contract it, to a diflFerent disease. 
In this class of specific diseases, of which the causes 
are not known, is small-pox, scarlet fever, measles, 
chicken-pox, etc. These same diseases are also classed 
as infectious, but entirely, it should be noted, on account 
of their close resemblance to those infectious diseases 
whose determining factor is positively known to be a 
micro-organism. 

In the list of infectious diseases of known and unknown 
etiology which follows, it will perhaps come as a sur- 
prise to the student that the cause of so many diseases 
is as yet unknown ; and that those of unknown etiology 
include many of our most common diseases. He 
might well ask the question, why have the causes of 
these every-day diseases not been discovered? There 
are probably two chief reasons : First, because the causes 
have been sought for as if they must be bacteria, 
whereas they very likely belong to entirely diflFerent 
genuses of organisms; and second, because the causes 



CAUSES OF DISEASE. 



II 



of some diseases, at least, are probably ultra-micro- 
scopic, i.e., too minute to be made out with the magnify- 
ing powers of the present microscope. 

It will also be noticed that syphilis is placed under 
both groups. This is done because, from the evidence 
accumulated thus far, it seems quite probable that the 
treponema pallidum (spirochcBta pallida) of Schaudinn 
and Hoflfman is the etiological factor. 



SPECIFIC INFECTIOUS 

DISEASES OF KNOWN 

ORIGIN. 

gonorrhcea. 

Epidemic Cerebro - spinal 

MENINGiriS. 

Pneumonia (Lobar). 

Tuberculosis. 

Leprosy. 

Glanders (Farcy). 

Tetanus (Lock-jaw). 

Diphtheria. 

Asiatic Cholera. 

Anthrax. 

Typhoid Fever. 

Bubonic Plague. 

Influenza (La Grippe). 

Malta Fever. 

Relapsing Fever. 

Acute Specific Dysentery 

(Bacillary Dysentery). 
Actinomycosis. 
Mycetoma (Madura Foot). 
Malarial Fever. 
Amcebic Dysentery. 
Syphilis. 



SPECIFIC INFECTIOUS 

DISEASES OF UNKNOWN 

ORIGIN. 

Epidemic Parotitis (Mumps). 

Syphilis. 

Rabies (Hydrophobia). 

Yellow Fever. 

Measles. 

Whooping-cough. 

Scarlatina (Scarlet Fever). 

Variola (Small-pox). 

Typhus Fever. 

Vaccinia (Cow-pox, Vaccina- 
tion). 

Varicella (Chicken-pox). 

Rubella (Rothehi). 

Dengue (Break-bone Fever). 

Rheumatic Fever (Rheumat- 
ism). 

Beri-beri. 

Glandular Fever (?). 

Aphthous Fever (Foot and 
Mouth Disease). 

Chancroid. 

Trachoma (Egyptian Ophthal- 
mia). 



12 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

Character- An infectious disease follows a cycle, or 
isncs OF course, which is typical of the class "infec- 
Infectious tious diseases." To be sure, there are 
Diseases. variations from the type, sometimes very 
pronounced, yet certainly never greater than one would 
anticipate in view of the differences exhibited by people 
in general. Moreover, the infectious agents causing 
them are subject to great variations in disease-producing 
power, a fact which influences the character of the 
infection either for better or for worse. Concerning 
these differences in pathogenicity as exhibited by infec- 
tious agents, we shall have much to say in a succeeding 
chapter. In this course or cycle of an infectious 
disease, four stages are commonly admitted: 

1. An incubation period. 

2. A period of invasion. 

3. A stationary period. 

] 4. A period of decline. 

These periods, or stages, of an infectious disease 
were first created upon purely clinical grounds; but 
they have been retained, because they are in entire 
harmony with modem discovery and experiment, a 
fact which adds another laurel to the fame of those dear 
old practitioners who knew absolutely nothing of the 
science of bacteriology. Besides, these periods as 
named by them, remarkable to say, graphically describe 
the progress of microbic action from the beginning of 
a disease to its termination. An infectious disease 



CAUSES OF DISEASE. 13 

must be regarded as a battle to the death between the 
body, on the one hand, and an infectious agent on the 
other; and as the S3niiptoms of each period correspond 
to various phases in the battle, we are able to recognize 
which side, for the nonce, has the upper hand. 

The incubation period is the time that 
Incubation elapses between the entrance of the disease- 
Period. causing microbe into the body and the 

onset of the S3niiptoms. 
When a person takes a drug which has the property 
of inducing sleep, e.g., opium, or a stimulant, such as 
whisky, there is observed an appreciable period between 
the ingestion of either, and the beginning of the phenom- 
ena which are characteristic for each drug. If we 
follow these phenomena, it is observed that according 
to the quantity taken, after they first began to appear, 
there is a gradual increase in the number and intensity 
of the S3niiptoms to a certain point, when they are 
maintained for a variable period. Finally, there is a 
gradual lessening of the influence until the drug is 
eliminated from the body. After the elimination there 
remain such phenomena as are the result of the removal 
of the influence, and the re-adjustment of the economy 
to its normal state. The phenomena just described 
only follow in case a dose of sufficient size has been 
ingested, the amount varying, naturally, with the 
individual. However, when that quantity which will 
produce S)niiptoms has been reached, the results are 



14 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

directly dependent upon the amount taken. There 

15 no increase of the drug within the body. 

When, however, we come to study the action of an 
infectious agent upon the body, we find the same 
interval of time between the entrance of the infectious 
agent and the onset of the S3niiptoms, but there is a 
very great difference in the events that take place to 
produce the reactions. The amount of opium or 
whisky ingested is fixed, so that whatever the eflfect, it 
results from just that amount. When infectious agents 
enter the body, however, they at once begin to multiply 
in enormous numbers, giving oflf all the while as a 
product of their activity most powerful poisons (toxins) . 
When a suflftcient amount of poison has been generated, 
S3niiptoms of the disease appear. In other words, the 
infectious agents that gain an entrance into the body 
have not of themselves sufl&cient power to produce the 
disease, but act through their facility of increasing their 
numbers. It is self-evident, therefore, why this period 
is called the "incubation period," since it "corresponds 
to the development (multiplication) of the pathogenic 
agents." Clinically the incubation period is also 
known as the latent period. 

The incubation period varies as to time in diflferent 
diseases, and in diflferent cases of the same disease. 
It may only be a few hours, as in erysipelas, or it may 
extend over months and years, as in hydrophobia and 
leprosy. This period is of very great importance from 



CAUSES OF DISEASE. 



IS 



a hygienic standpoint, in that it aflfects the length of 
quarantine imposed upon individuals exposed to con- 
tagious diseases. The following table taken principally 
from Roger's "Infectious Diseases" is worthy of careful 
study. 



INCUBATION PERIOD OF VARIOUS INFECTIOUS 

DISEASES. 





Average. 


Minimum. 


Maximum. 


Anthrax 


2 ( 


days 


I day 


3 days 


Bubonic Plague 


4-6 


ti 


2 " 


7 " 


Chancroid 


1-2 


tt 


I " 


3 " 


Cholera 


2-4 


tt 


I " 


6 " 


Diphtheria 


2 


tt 


2 " 


IS " 


Erysipelas 


4-6 


tt 


3 hours 


32 " 


Influenza 


3-4 


tt 


I day 


s " 


Glanders 


3-S 


tt 


24 hours 


3 months 


Gonorrhoea 


3-S 


tt 


i (?)-2 days 


i-several weeks 


Mumps 


IS 


tt 


7 days 


30 days 


Malarial Fever 


6-IO 


tt 


99 hours 


several months 


Recurrent Fever 


s-6 


tt 


86 " 


8 days 


Measles 


9 


tt 


4 days 


14 " 


Hydrophobia 


20-60 


tt 


13 " 


18 mos. to 3 yrs 


Rubeola 


18 


tt 


s " 


21 days 


Scarlatina 


2-S 


tt 


7 hours 


7 weeks 


Small-pox 


12 


tt 


7 days 


15 days 


Syphilis 


20-30 


tt 


10 " 


so " 


Tetanus (Lock-jaw) 


2-3 


tt 


3 hours 


3S " 


Typhoid Fever 


14 


tt 


3 days (?) 


31 " 


Typhus Fever 


12 


tt 


o(?) 


33 " 


Vaccinia 


3 


tt 


3 days 


7 " 



i6 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 





Average, 


MmiMITM. 


Maximum. 


Varicella 


14-15 days 


13 days 


19 days 


Whooping-cough 


8 


2 '* 


8 " 


Yellow Fever 


3-4 " 


2 " 


6 " 


Leprosy 


(?) 


(?) 


32 years 


Tuberculosis 


(?) incubation period frequently long. 


Dengue 


4 days 


3 days 


5 days 


Pneumonia 


24 hours 


(?) 


2 or more days 


Dysenter}'(Bacillary) 8 days 


6 days 


48 hours 


Malta Fever 


6-10 " 


(?) 


10 days 


Beri-beri 


Several months (?) 





During the incubation period S3niiptoms 
Period of are wanting, and, as far as the person is 
Invasion. aware, he experiences nothing to indicate 

that he is not in normal health. When, 
however, the body awakens to the* impending danger,- it 
brings its defensive forces into play in an effort to throw 
off the infectious agents and their toxins. Clinically, 
these reactions are represented by the first S3niiptoms 
of disease, and are knov^m as the "s3niiptoms of onset." 
They indicate that invasion of the body by an infectious 
agent has taken place. It is for this reason that this 
period is spoken of as the period of invasion. 

The period of invasion also differs in various diseases, 
and in various cases of the same disease. The s)niip- 
toms of invasion may appear with startling suddenness, 
as the chill which occurs at the onset of pneumonia, or 
the convulsion in children which initiates most of the 
eruptive fevers; or they may develop so gradually as 



CAUSES OF DISEASE. 17 

to make it impossible for the patient to say when he 
really began to feel ill. This slow insidious manner 
of onset is the rule in typhoid fever and pulmonary 
tuberculosis. 

After the period of invasion comes the 
Stationary stationary period, the symptoms of which 
Period. are so characteristic for each particular 

infectious disease as to form the basis for 
our classification of infectious diseases in general, and 
of identification of any one in particular. If the 
invasion be sudden, the stationary period is usually 
quickly reached (in pneumonia, a few hours) ; if gradual, 
the stationary period may be prolonged a week or more 
(e.g., typhoid fever). The stationary period presents 
more or less uniformity in S3niiptoms, with ameliora- 
tions or aggravations of the symptoms correspond- 
ing to oscillations of advantage of either body or 
germ. 

Variations from the type of the stationary period in 
any infectious disease also occur with a fair degree of 
frequency. The stationary period may be cut short 
by the body-forces being marshaled at the onset, and 
the disease end there ; or it may be prolonged far beyond 
the average limits for the disease. On the other hand, 
the microbes may get the upper hand from the start, 
stifle (in their incipiency) the body's efforts to react 
and close the picture even before the stationary period 
had really begun. However, these courses are not 



i8 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

typical; in the typical case, unless the battle is decided 
in favor of the microbes, the stationary period passes 
into the period of decline. Where the stationary period 
of any disease is abbreviated by recovery, we speak of 
the disease as having been aborted ; where abbreviation 
or prolongation of any disease occurs, or where marked 
variations from the type take place, the disease is 
spoken of as having pursued an aberrant form. 

The period of decline is expressive of the 
Period of victory that the body has won over the 
Decline. infecting agents. This period is taken up 

with the physiological re-adjustments and 
anatomical repairs necessary to bring the body back 
to health. 

Precisely as the onset of a disease may be 
Crisis and either sudden or gradual, so may the 
Lysis, decline be characterized either by a most 

astonishingly rapid amelioration of the 
symptoms, or by slow, progressive improvement. In 
the former case we speak of termination of the disease 
by crisis, in the latter, by lysis. 

Termination by crisis is well illustrated by pneumonia, 
termination by lysis, by tjrphoid fever. Crisis is 
perhaps the most peculiar and mystifying phenomenon 
that ever occurs in disease. Always awaited with so 
much anxiety, when if has happened it may weU be 
joyously received, since it conveys to the physician the 
knowledge that recovery, "e?/ which it is the residtj^ 



CAUSES OF DISEASE. 19 

not the cause, has been eflfected. And the same is 
true of lysis, it is the harbinger of the fact that the 
infectious agents are being vanquished. In the matter 
of termination, the rule is not always followed ; accord- 
ingly, we sometimes find pneumonia terminating by 
lysis, and less often, typhoid fever by crisis. One 
curious exception to the usual form that crisis takes, 
i.e., reduction in temperature, occurs in Asiatic cholera. 
Instead of the temperature falling, it rises from below 
normal (sub-normal) to normal or above normal. The 
characteristic feature of the crisis is thus reversed, a 
thing which is associated with the other reversal that 
takes place in the stationary period of cholera, i.e., a 
sub-normal temperature. 

An infectious disease is due to the entrance 
Local and and growth of infectious agents, and to the 
General toxins (poisons) which the latter generate. 
Infections. When infectious agents gain an entrance 

into the body, they act in one of two ways, 
namely : 

(i) Either they remain localized near their portal of 
entry, or in some near or distant organ, during the 
whole course of the disease; or, 

(2) they first establish a local lesion near their portal 
of entry, or in some near or distant organ, and then, 
from this as a focus, invade the whole body. 

The first instance is descriptive of what is called a 
local infection, the second, of a general infection. In 



20 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

both cases the toxins play the same important r61e; 
yet while in the one they are formed in only one portion 
of the body, in the other, since the infectious agents 
are scattered, they are formed in all parts. Infectious 
diseases which result from toxins eliminated by micro- 
organisms growing in a circumscribed area are known 
as toxcBmias, while those in which the micro-organisms 
live and multiply in the blood-stream are called sep- 
ticcBmias (in cases in which bacteria are the invaders, 
bactericBmias). A general infection, therefore, corre- 
sponds to a septicaemia, or bacteriaemia. It must not 
be inferred, however, that a toxaemia always accom- 
panies a local infection, for there are many local infec- 
tions in which the action of the agents and their toxins 
are purely local ; the word toxaemia is reserved for local 
infections associated with constitutional S)niiptoms of 
poisoning. To illustrate : No one would call an abscess 
an infectious disease, although it represents the localized 
activity of certain bacteria, and is therefore correctly 
spoken of as a local infection. On the other hand, 
tetanus, a constitutional disease, has as its local infection 
a wound, frequently so trivial, that it has healed before 
the convulsions begin which mark the onset of this 
terrible disease. It is the toxins formed by the bacilli 
at one point, and absorbed, which give rise to the 
toxaemia. 

A local, or a general infection, may be caused by either 
a specific or a non-specific infectious agent, but not by 



CAUSES OF DISEASE. 21 

any specific or non-specific agent. Some specific 
agents only give rise to local infectious diseases (toxae- 
mias), while others only to septicaemias (or bacteriae- 
mias). Typical examples of toxaemias due to specific 
agents are furnished by diphtheria, tetanus (lock-jaw), 
rabies (hydrophobia), and cholera; of septicaemias 
(or bacteriaemias), by anthrax, typhoid fever, relapsing 
fever, bubonic plague, influenza (La grippe), malta 
fever, etc. Besides the diseases here given, there are 
many others on the border-line between toxaemias and 
septicaemias, that is to say, the infection may be local- 
ized, yet there is a distinct tendency for the infectious 
agents to invade the blood. Such a disease is pneu- 
monia which, while it is often an infection localized 
in the lungs, occurs in a form (croupous) in which the 
pneumococci which cause it are found in the blood in 
about ninety per cent of the cases. Pulmonary tuber- 
culosis (consumption) is another case in point; the 
disease may remain localized in the lungs for months 
and even years, yet the specific bacilli often invade the 
economy. When they do, the germs are distributed 
everywhere, and a rapid termination of life results. 
This form of tuberculosis, called by the profession 
acute miliary tuberculosis, is well known to the laity 
under the name of rapid^ galloping^ or quick, consump- 
tion. 

There is another word in current use in medicine 
that requires explanation in this place, viz., pyaemia. 



22 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

By pyaemia is understood an infection in which the 
micro-organisms have established suppurating foci 
in different parts of the body. Where the several 
localizations have had their origin in another, single 
focus, the former are often, although erroneously, spoken 
of as metastatic abscesses. 

Heretofore the course of a disease due to 
Combined only one infectious agent has been described, 
Infections, and while we usually, in acute disease, 

are dealing with a single or uncombined 
infection, the opposite, mixed or combined infections, 
are not uncommon. Thus occur together measles 
and scarlet fever, measles and whooping-cough, scarlet 
fever and diphtheria, typhoid fever and pneumonia, 
etc. When two infections occur in the same individual, 
the S3niiptoms of one disease are likely to be masked or 
held in abeyance by those of the other, the extent to 
which this takes place depending upon whether they 
develop simultaneously or in succession. It also 
depends upon the nature of the diseases. Thus pneu- 
monia for a number of days may run so typical a course 
in a person suffering from consumption as to deceive 
the ablest clinician into believing that only one disease, 
pneumonia, exists. On the other hand, pneumonia in 
the alcoholic, in the sufferer from some chronic dis- 
order, e.g., Bright's disease, diabetes, chronic heart 
disease, or coming on during the course of an acute 
infection, may be entirely overlooked in spite of the 



CAUSES OF DISEASE. 23 

fact that it is known to be the most frequent direct 
cause of death. 

However, two infections may concurrently run 
typical courses in the same individual. This happens 
when scarlet fever and measles develop simultaneously. 

When an infectious agent attacks an 
Secondary individual who is already suflFering from 
Infection, the attacks of another, we speak of the 

former as a secondary injection. Most 
secondary infections follow as a result of the diminution 
in vital resistance consequent upon the first infection. 
Apart from the ordinary diseases of childhood, there 
are two notable infections that are very commonly 
secondary, because they take advantage of any depres- 
sion in vital resistance that the body has suffered. 
Their frequency and permiscuity are so well established, 
that every precaution should always be taken to guard 
a patient from their attack. Reference is made to 
tuberculosis and pneumonia. The micro-organisms 
which cause these two diseases lead all others as second- 
ary invaders of the body, and undoubtedly cause a 
larger number of deaths than all the diseases combined 
to which they are secondary. Next to the tubercle 
bacillus and the pneumococcus in point of frequency 
as secondary invaders come the common pyogenic 
or pus-producing bacteria, among which, it should 
always be remembered, is included the microbe of 
erysipelas. 



34 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 



Intectious 



An interesting and important phenomenon 
concerning the infectious diseases is their 
g self-limiting nature. Clinical evidence 

Lnarmr abundantly corroborates the verity of this 

statement, since treated or untreated, 
every infectious disease foUows, as it were, a prescribed 
course. The fact that we divide this course into periods 
is a significant admission. Except in the case of a 
few diseases, for which we have specifics, the progress 
and termination of an infectious disease is determined 
well-nigh entirely by the reactionary or fighting powers 
of the body. All living things struggle for existence, 
which is only another way of saying they resist de- 
struction. The efforts that an organism puts forth to 
survive is an inherent quality that it can no more 
control than it can its birth. Therefore, when the body 
is attacked by an infectious agent, it sustains the attack 
with such weapons as nature, through heredity, has 
supplied it for this very purpose; and to this fact, that 
nature is by far the greatest healer, all physicians and 
nurses cannot fail to testify. 

In the sense in which self-limiting is used when refer- 
ring to infectious diseases, there is, therefore, implied 
the meaning that the body delimits the period of disease 
irrespective of medication. It may seem to aspiring 
novices in medicine a sad admission, and one that may 
cause them deep disappointment, yet it cannot be 
denied that infectious diseases tend to spontaneous 



CAUSES OF DISEASE. 25 

recovery. This curious fact is the result of natural 
phenomena. 

Animal experiments have taught us that 

when certain substances injurious to the 

Antibodies, well-being of an animal are introduced 

into the blood, other substances are formed 
which have the power of neutralizing 
further injections of the first. Substances manufac- 
tured by a living organism in this way are technically 
called "antibodies;" and the antitoxins of commerce, 
which are prepared from living animals by inoculating 
them with the toxins (poisons) of various diseases 
belong to this class. Antibodies are formed in an animal 
only when the substances which give rise to them 
have destroyed a certain amount of tissue, the injured 
tissues supplying the stimulants which incite to activity 
the protective functions of the body. When produced, 
antibodies have no beneficial effects whatsoever upon 
the tissues already destroyed, but act simply either to 
neutralize any additional toxin which may yet j be 
circulating, or which may get into the body from the 
exterior at another time. For these reasons antitoxins 
are intrinsically prophylactic^ rather than curative, in as 
much as if inoculated into a healthy person, they guard 
against disease by preventing tissue destruction ; whereas 
after infection, they safe-guard the body from greater 
injury than has already occurred by neutralizing any 
circulating poison. It is this latter action which has 



a6 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

given them their reputation as curative principles. 
The production of antibodies represents the reactionary 
or fighting powers of the body above referred to, and 
is its natural weapon of defense against disease. 

As the result of bacterial infections, distinctly differ- 
ent antibodies are formed which owe their origin to 
peculiarities in attack of the infecting agents. All 
bacteria produce disease through their toxins, but 
because the manner in which the latter are eliminated 
is not the same for all, there arise differences both in the 
nature of the protective substances, and the manner in 
which these substances protect. From the standpoint 
of disease-production bacteria may be divided in a 
broad way into two classes, viz., (i) those that attack 
the body rather through a diffusible poison, which they 
excrete, than by enormous reproduction; and (2) those 
in which multiplication is the primary or essential 
phenomenon, toxin-excretion subsidiary. Bacteria of 
the first order, through their toxins, give rise to sub- 
stances which neutralize the latter, that is, antitoxins. 
Bacteria of the second order, contrariwise, stimulate the 
body to the formation of substances antagonistic to 
the bacteria themselves, i.e., antibacterial or bacteri- 
cidal substances. The protection that antibodies which 
are bactericidal furnish the body comes through their 
power of dissolving the bacteria which cause the 
disease. If immunity against infection is, therefore, 
contrasted from the standpoint of the etiological agents, 



CAUSES OF DISEASE. 27 

it is either antitoxic or bactericidal. Technically bacteri- 
cidal antibodies are known as lysins, or bacteriolysins. 

Antedating and also accompan3ring the 
Agglutinins, formation of the solvent antibodies (bac- 
teriolysins), there appears in the blood- 
serum of infected animals and persons other antibodies 
which have the property of drawing together in groups 
or clumps the invading bacteria. This phenomenon 
is called agglutination, the substances which excite 
it, agglutinins. 

Agglutination, it is commonly accepted, has these 
two advantages : It is a preliminary stage in the process 
of immimity (it appears before the bacteriolytic sub- 
stance); it facilitates the ingestion of the bacteria by 
the phagocytes (phagocytosis). 

Bacteriolysins and agglutinins are specific substances, 
just as antitoxins are, and therefore act only when 
brought into relation with such bacteria as call them 
forth. This knowledge of the specificity of the agglu- 
tinins is made use of for the diagnosis of various 
diseases, especially typhoid fever, the examination for 
agglutination in the latter disease constituting the well- 
known Widal reaction. 

In recovery or immunity from diseases 

Opsonins, due to the second class of bacteria, i.e., 

those which attack the body largely through 

multiplication, another antibody has lately come to 

the fore which bids fair to overshadow all others in 



28 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

importance. This is a bactericidal antibody, opsonin 
(I prepare a meal for), that acts in conjunction with the 
leucoc3i;es to rid the body of invading bacteria. 

Opsonin is normally found in the blood, and is 
increased in immunity. It acts in such a way upon 
infectious agents that they not only strongly attract the 
phagocytic leucocytes (positive chemotaxis), but makes 
them easier of digestion by the latter. It is well that 
the associated action of opsonin and phagocytosis 
has been discovered, for bacteriologists had well-nigh 
despaired of producing bactericidal serums comparable 
in potency to diphtheria and tetanus antitoxins; the 
latter, once their toxins were separated from the bac- 
teria, were comparatively easy to prepare; but in the 
case of those bacteria in which little or no diffusible 
poison is secreted, the problem of making immime 
serums presented insurmountable difficulties. This 
is the reason that in a long list of diseases, such as 
typhoid fever, bubonic plague, Asiatic cholera, bacillary 
dysentery, etc., immune serums have not been forth- 
coming. In opsonin, however, we have a force to 
work with which, it would appear, can be increased 
at will, so that if the expectations of workers with 
opsonins are realized, it will not be long before the 
immunization and cure of the above mentioned mala- 
dies will be in our hands. 

It is now almost twenty years since Metchnikoff 
first called attention to the part that certain white 



CAUSES OF DISEASE. 29 

cells in the blood take in both the prevention and cure 
of infections. These cells (leucoc3i;es), which he 
called phagocytes, he believed acted through their 
power of taking up and digesting bacteria. During 
all these years since the publication of his theory of 
phagocytosis Metchnikoff has added many valuable 
facts corroborating his views. In the light of the 
recently discovered antibody, opsonin, his views on 
the protective function of the leucocytes are strongly 
supported, in that data for the first time is supplied 
which explains the conditions under which phagocy- 
tosis is active. Opsonin in the blood-serum of immune 
animals and persons sensitizes or opsonizes the infec- 
tious agents for easier destrtiction by the phagocytes. 

Injuries to tissues per se produce S3nnptoms, through 
the disturbance of functions which such loss to the 
economy entails; but besides these S3nnptoms, there 
are others, in every infectious disease, which can be 
definitely ascribed to the production of the defensive 
substances. The phenomena of disease, therefore, 
are of a composite character, comprising both the 
symptoms of injury and those of defense. What part 
of the S3nnptoms each of these factors causes in a case, 
it is impossible to determine, but of this we may always 
feel sure (because the experimental proofs in its favor 
are conclusive) no insignificant part of the fever and 
general malaise in every infectious disease is a necessary 
adjunct to antibody production. This fact lends the 



I 



30 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

Strongest support to the view, formerly much debated, 
that fever is a benign and necessary feature in the class 
of diseases we are discussing. The modem concep- 
tion of disease takes the position that recovery from 
an infection is always brought about either through the 
production of an immunizing substance by the body, 
or through the introduction of the same from without. 
In the body, the period of invasion marks the beginning 
of antibody formation, which from this time goe-; on 
until either recovery or death supervenes. If the former, 
sufficient antibody is formed to equalize the bacteria 
or their poisons and prevent further inroads of either 
upon the tissues; if the latter, the body's defensive 
mechanism fails to act through weakness, or is over- 
come by the intensity and massiveness of the virus. 
The use of antitoxin in disease marks the highest refine- 
ment of specific medication, in that an immunizing sub- 
stance is injected into a patient which can be depended 
upon to counteract or neutralize a definite poisonous 
(toxic) substance. It aims to take from the patient 
the burden of producing antibodies, which at best is 
slow and too often a doubtful quality, by injecting 
them fully formed and active. These have been pre- 
pared from some animal which has been subjected to 
the poison and has recovered. In other words, the 
immunity forced upon an animal is transferred to the 
patient. From what has been said concerning the 
action of antibodies in that they only neutralize 






CAUSES OF DISEASE. 31 

opposites, it is obvious that the earlier they are used, 
the more beneficial and potent will they prove in treat- 
ing disease. It is their late use after great tissue de- 
struction has occurred, that is responsible for failure. 
In an immune person or animal, antibodies are found 
throughout the body, in largest quantity in the blood. 
And it is such blood-serunty separated from the other 
elements of the blood, which is the antitoxin of world- 
wide fame. Antitoxin (antibody) not only causes no 
reactions when injected into a patient— the animal 
from which it was obtained suffered these — ^but it 
causes the symptoms due to the body's efforts to produce 
it on its own account to at once abate. Moreover, if 
an amount sulfficient to neutralize all floating poison is 
injected, the S3nnptoms due to the action of this are 
also eliminated. Therefore, there only remain such 
disturbances as are inevitable when tissues are destroyed 
and must needs be re-formed. And here again are seen 
the wonderful workings of nature. In those diseases 
for which we have specifics, the body-forces play just 
as important a r61e as the specifics; specifics neutralize 
the bacteria and their toxins, but they cannot restore 
to normal the tissues which these agents have injured, 
nor the functions of organs which they have im- 
paired. Repair is a function of the organism which 
may be assisted but never supplanted. The part 
played by the body in this respect in infectious diseases 
is analogous to that which it plays in surgery. The 



32 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

surgeon, in operating for the removal of malignant 
tumors or for some other urgent cause, does his utmost 
when the dangerous condition for which he operates 
is removed. But how much would his surgery avail, 
if the body did not potentially possess amazing powi 
for repair and reconstruction?* 

Nearly all complications occurring in 
course of diseases, whether they be infec- 
tious or non-mfectious, are due to mfec- 
tious agents; and the infectious agents principally at 
fault are bacteria. The source of the infecting bacteria 
depends upon circumstance. It may happen that the 
agent has its habitat upon the individual's integument, 
or within a cavity of the body leading to the exterior. 
Thus, pneumonia, occurring as a complication, is 
caused by the pneumococcus, a micro-organism that 
almost everyone harbors in his mouth even in health. 
An instance of contamination from the integument is 
afforded by furunculosis (boils), a common sequel to 
various infections during or after convalescence is 
established. 

A second source for bacteria which complicafej 
disease, is found In objects, insects, and persons thai 
xome in contact with the patient. Thus wounds 
;soiled with earth are those In which tetanus (lock-jaw), 
and gaseous gangrene, are liable to develop, becaus* 
the bacteria which bring about these Infections havi 
*See Chapter on loflammatioD. 



'ei:^^_ 



ha^™ 
nds 

w), 

ausfl^H 
lav^^l 



CAUSES OF DISEASE. 33 

their home in the ground. The bacteria that produce 
pus (pyogenic bacteria) are also found in the ground. 

Insects, such as flies, bed-bugs, mosquitoes, etc., 
may be the means of conveying infections. Finally, 
persons may convey infections. Among persons con- 
veying infections, physicians and nurses are especially 
dangerous on account of the frequent and close contact 
that they have with the sick. 

The manner in which complications have heretofore 
been spoken of places them in the same category with 
secondary infections. This conception of them, how- 
ever, requires qualification. Besides resulting from 
invasion of the body by bacteria other than the one 
producing the original infection, complications may be 
due to another localization in a distant part of the body 
of the same organism that produced the original infec- 
tion. Under such circumstances we do not speak of 
the complication as a secondary infection, but a second- 
ary localization or metastasis. Ignorance of the nature of 
infectious agents and their migratory tendency led, in the 
past, to such names as t)^hoid-pneumonia, a designation 
which is no longer countenanced because we know that 
this disease, even when the pneumonia accompanies or 
initiates tj^hoid, is typhoid fever with pulmonary locali- 
zation of the t)^hoid bacillus in the lungs. Misconcep- 
tions concerning their origin were likewise responsible 
for such names as t)^ho-malarial fever, diphtheritic 
tonsillitis, etc., hybrids for which there is no excuse. 
3 



34 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

In the course of all chronic diseases of 
Terminal whatever nature, the suflferer is particularly 
Infections, prone to have his original disease com- 
plicated by some infection. Indeed, it is 
the latter that is the common cause of death. Pneu- 
monia heads the list as a secondary invader, and also 
in bringing about a termination of life. Next in point 
of frequency is tuberculosis, and third, are pyogenic 
infections. When secondary infections, or complica- 
tions, kill, they are spoken of as terminal injections. 

Whether the body ever returns to a normal 
Evolution state after having recovered from an infec 
OF Disease, tious disease is still an open question. In 

the large majority of cases, it apparently 
does, but we must always remember that time, only, 
can answer this question in any individual case. 
Certainly a "spell" of any one of the infectious diseases 
is not regarded by the profession as interfering with 
the usual expectancy.* Nevertheless, as the years go 
by, we are laying more and more stress upon past 
illness as a factor in present disorders. 

For the most part, "diseases that owe their origin 
to past illness are affections of organs," e.g., Bright's 
disease, chronic heart disease, locomotor ataxia, the 
organs being involved in the infectious process at the 
time of the acute infection, and apparently subsiding 

♦Expectancy — the mean or average duration of life of individuak 
after any specified age. 



CAUSES OF DISEASE. 35 

with it. We say apparently advisedly, because, although 
the acute inflammation subsides, it too often gives 
place to a chronic inflammation that extends over 
years. This chronic inflammatory state is no longer 
dependent in most cases upon the infectious principle 
which caused the initial lesion, but is a slow sclerosis, 
or cicatrization, which consists in a gradual contraction 
and substitution of the normal tissues of a part by scar 
tissue. The change is especially prone to occur in 
organs that have sustained an injury of one kind or 
another, and is really a vicarious evolution that the 
tissues are subject to. There is a danger in the new 
condition that arises both from the contractions, and 
the loss in organic cellular constituents, since in the 
one case functions are interfered with, in the other, 
metabolism* is disturbed. The seriousness of the 
lesion depends upon the organ in which the original 
injury was located, and its importance to the vital 
processes of the body. One or two illustrations will 
suffice to elucidate our point. A person has typhoid 
fever and apparently makes a complete recovery. Ten, 
fifteen or twenty years afterwards he seeks medical 
advice for shortness of breath and cough. His case 
is diagnosed as chronic heart disease. Whence came 
the lesion of his heart valves ? When closely questioned, 
he may remember that the physician who attended 

* Metabolism — chemical change within the body in nutrition and 
secretion. 



36 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

him at the time of his fever did remark that there was 
some slight evidence of cardiac injury. But even this 
evidence of the connection between his present trouble 
and the earlier typhoid fever is now no longer necessary ; 
we have learned through experience the connection. 
Are typhoid bacilli causing the present trouble ? Assur- 
edly not ! The original cause was an inflammation of the 
heart valves from the typhoid bacilli, most likely, or 
some other microbe that gained an entrance into the 
blood during his attack of typhoid. The lesion of 
the heart, to all appearances, healed. But a cicatrix 
remained, that, according to the manner of aU cica- 
trices, continued to contract, imtil through the disability 
it produced in the functioning of the heart, gave rise to 
symptoms. Substantially the same history is obtained 
in many cases of Bright's disease (chronic nephritis), 
the antecedent disease being either scarlet fever, 
measles, diphtheria, or typhoid fever. 

We have used the word infectious a number of times, 
but purposely have avoided using another word, 
namely, contagious y on account of the many loose inter- 
pretations that are given it. To us it seems best to 
speak of a contagion, or a contagious disease, only 
when the microbe is readily communicable from person 
to person by mediate or immediate contact. The 
term should be used as descriptive of a quality of the 
germ or of a microbic disease. It should not be used 
synonymously with infectious or infection; in fact, if 



CAUSES OF DISEASE. 37 

the words were synonymous, we would scarcely describe 
a disease, such as diphtheria, as being both infectious 
and contagious. A disease may be contagious, or it 
may be infectious; or it may be both contagious and 
infectious. Malaria is an infectious disease, but not 
contagious; scabies (itch) is contagious but not infec- 
tious; diphtheria is both contagious and infectious. 
Diseases exhibit at times, however, marked differences 
in regard to these characteristics. Sometimes an infec- 
tious disease not ordinarily contagious may, in some 
manner as yet not understood, become contagious. 
This happens in pneumonia, which under such cir- 
cumstances partakes of the characteristics of an epi- 
demic disease. 

Of late years it has seemed best to some 
CoMMUNi- ^^ ^^ ^^^^^ ^f ^^ indifferent 

CABLE. ' 

manner in which the words infectious and 
contagious have been used in describing a disease, to 
omit them entirely, and in their stead to speak of these 
diseases as communicable. This seems an excellent 
innovation because only diseases caused by living things 
are, strictly speaking, communicable. An objection 
might be made to the term because it would include 
parasitic affections, but this cannot for long have any 
real force ; it is dilfficult at best to draw a nice distinction 
between many diseases due to parasites and the infec- 
tious agents, and we might just as well for good have 
a word adaptable and usable for both. 



CHAPTER II. 
BACTERIOLOGY. 

Bacteria (sing., bacterium) are low forms of life 
that are generally conceded to belong to the vegetable 
kingdom. They resemble the moulds in many ways; 
in fact, one name for them is fission-moulds, a term 
derived from the circumstance that multiplication of 
the individual bacterium takes place by simple division 
of the whole organism into two parts. They further 
resemble the moulds in not possessing chlorophyl, the 
green coloring matter by virtue of which in the pres- 
ence of sunlight, plants are enabled to decompose 
carbon dioxide and ammonia, and use their constituents 
for food. 

The absence of chlorophyl in bacteria necessitates 
some form of proteid as food, whence results the phenom- 
enon of the lowest forms of life consuming the same 
kinds of food as the higher animals. 

Bacteria live chiefly upon the remains of animals and 
plants, to a lesser extent upon living forms of both 
kingdoms. But whilst they share a common food 
with animals, the disintegrations which they work in it 

38 



BACTERIOLOGY. 39 

result in simpler and more important end-products. 
These consist of the gases absolutely essential to plant 
life, namely, carbon dioxide (CO2) and ammonia 
(NH3). A third end-product is water (HjO). 

The amount of carbon dioxide produced by animals 
out of starches and sugars is insignificant in comparison 
with the needs of the vegetable kingdom, and were there 
no other source for this important food element, the 
plant world would either sufiFer a great deficit or be 
restricted in its growth. The same is true of nitrogen, 
another important constituent of plants, and required 
by them in an easily assimilable form, such as ammonia 
(NH3). It is the peculiar ojffice of bacteria to supply 
plants with the largest amounts of both of these constit- 
uents. On this account they are the natural inter- 
mediaries between plants and animals in point of food 
production, playing by far the most important part in 
the economy of nature. Without bacteria, plant-life 
would be scanty or entirely wanting; and since the 
animal kingdom depends upon plants for existence, 
there would result a world lacking in every form of 
higher animal life. 

The part that bacteria play as scavengers 
Arts and of the earth and providers of food for 
Industries, plant-life, only displays a limited side of 

their usefulness. In the arts and industries 
they are as essential to modem economic life as are the 
ingenious mechanical inventions of man. Many secret 



40 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

processes now in use in the arts and manufactures 
are but devices to harness these natural forces. Thus 
in the manufacture of linen, hemp and sponges, in the 
butter, cheese, and vinegar industries, in tobacco- 
curing, etc., bacteria play the important r61e. 

Curiously, in the popular mind, bacteria 
Saprophytes, are only associated with disease, and are 

regarded with abhorrence on that account; 
yet of the untold hundreds of species, only about forty 
are known to produce disease in human beings. 

Bacteria which are useful to mankind in so many 
ways belong to the class of organisms known as obligate 
saprophytes, i.e., "an organism that lives upon dead 
organic matter." Bacteria that produce disease, on 
the other hand, belong to the parasites and infectious 
agents, a description of which has akeady been given 
in the preceding chapter. However, the ability of a 
bacterium to live upon dead organic matter does not 
determine its status from the standpoint of the produc- 
tion of disease. The obligate saprophytes, as their 
name implies, are restricted to a diet of dead things; 
but the parasitic bacteria, while preferably parasitic 
in their habits, may nevertheless lead a saprophytic 
existence. Such species are known as jacidtative 
saprophytes. Most of the disease-causing bacteria 
belong to this class, a factor that has proven of incal- 
culable value in studying them. Indeed, bacteriology 
dates its rapid progress from the time that pathogenic 



BACTERIOLOGY. 41 

bacteria were first grown upon an artificial pabulum in 
the laboratory. The adaptability of bacteria to various 
kinds of foods explains the spread of many diseases by 
foods and water, and also the tenacity that certain 
diseases display in clinging to a house or to clothing. 
Almost everywhere there are small amounts of organic 
matter and moisture, and these microscopic forms 
of life which we are considering require such infini- 
tesimal amounts of either, that it is possible for them 
to live where nothing else can. 

Harmful bacteria, that is, those that are 
^A^N^"" ""^^^^^^ ""^ producing disease, are caUed 
PATHOGENIC P^^^g^^^f' hamJcss varieties, or sapro- 
Bacteria. phytes, are called non-pathogenic. A 

pathogenic bacterium, however, cannot 
always produce disease when it finds lodgment within 
the body. This special characteristic is extraordinarily 
variable, appearing and disappearing under a variety 
of circumstances. Pathogenicity in a bacterium depends 
upon its power to produce toxins (poisons), a function 
which is extremely susceptible of loss by exposure 
to many natural agencies. A pathogenic bacterium 
that can produce its specific toxins, and therefore bring 
about disease, is spoken of as virulent, one that cannot, 
as non-virident. For the foregoing reasons we recognize 
in all pathogenic bacteria both varieties. However, 
virulence and non-virulence are evanescent qualities, 
requiring only alterations in environment to be made 



42 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

to appear and disappear. What the circumstances 
are that lead to this change will be explained in the 
third and fourth chapters. 

In size bacteria are the smallest living 
Size. things that we can see with the modem 
microscope. In masses they are readily 
seen with the unaided eye as moist, slimy, or dry films 
floating upon the surface of foul fluids or water, or 
covering decomposing animal or vegetable matter. 
Some of them produce beautiful colors ; others have the 
peculiar property of producing phosphorescence; still 
others cause the stench of decomposition. 

Bacteria vary in size between five-tenths of a micro- 
millimeter and twenty to forty micro-millimeters, and 
as a micro-millimeter is the one-thousandth part of a 
millimeter (about one-twenty-five-thousandth of an 
inch), only a vague conception of their minuteness can 
be formed unless one has had experience in working 
with microscopic forms of life. 

What bacteria lack in size they make up 
in the astonishing capacity that they 
possess of rapid multiplication. Each 
bacterium consists of a single cell only (unicellular), 
. which under favorable circumstances produces count- 
less other cells. This is accomplished by simple 
division (fission) of the whole cell body. The two 
individuals formed out of the first one, begin dividing 
into four before complete separation has taken place; 



BACTERIOLOGY. 43 

the four divide into eight, the eight into sixteen, the 
sixteen into thirty-two. Since it takes only thirty 
minutes for one cell to divide, it can be computed 
approximately how many new individuals will be 
formed in twenty-four hours out of a single bacterium. 
Conn gives the number as "over 16,500,000 in one 
day, and about 281,500,000 in two days. In three 
days, at this rate of multiplication they would produce 
a mass of bacteria weighing 16,000,000 pounds." 
However, these figures have no practical significance, 
and are given merely to convey to the reader some con- 
ception of their astonishing rate of multiplication. In 
nature multiplication is rapid, as may be inferred from 
the great changes they work, but their activities are 
limited to their usefulness. Their growth is held in 
check by the products of their own metabolism (excre- 
tory products), by the absence of suitable food, and by 
natural forces acting upon them as they do upon all 
creation. 

When examined with a microscope, indi- 
Shape. vidual bacteria are seen to look like so 

many dots, dashes, and commas. There 
are thousands of species of bacteria, yet each species 
conforms more or less closely to one of these three 
shapes. According to their form, therefore, they are 
called, cocci, bacilli^ and spirilla, and under these 
designations all known species are classified. 



44 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

To the cocci, or micrococci (sing., coccus) — ^belong 
the dots or spherical forms. 

Fig. I. — ^Staphylococci. Streptococci. Diplococci. Tetrads. Sarcins. 

(Williams.) 

To the bacilli (sing., bacillus) — the dash-like or 
rod-shaped bacteria; and to the 




y» 






Fig. 2. — ^Bacilli of Various Forms. (Williams.) 

Spirilla (sing., spirillum) — ^the spiral, corkscrew, or 
comma-shaped forms. 



V4/ 



^ 41 ^ . ^ 

Fig. 3. — Spirilli of Various Forms. (Williams.) 

Certain of the bacteria exhibit a singular 
Grouping. arrangement to each other, when examined 

on a slide under the microscope, that is 
peculiar and constant. This is found in the group 
micrococcus. It is due to the manner of multiplication ; 
the bacilli and spirilli multiply by division through 



BACTERIOLOGY. 45 

their shortest diameter only, whereas the micrococci, 
having one diameter the same as another, may divide 
in any direction. The result of this difference in the 
manner of dividing is that the relationship of individual 
bacteria to each other is markedly characteristic, and 
permits of its use as a distinguishing feature. To 
distinguish the various micrococci from each other, they 
are therefore divided into the: 

Staphylococci (sing., staphylococcus) — when they 
are arranged in groups which bear a certain resemblance 
to a bunch of grapes. Diplococci (sing., diplococcus) — 
when they are arranged in pairs. Streptococci (sing., 
streptococcus) — ^when they are arranged in chains, 
i.e., attached end to end in lines of longer or shorter 
lengths. 

When cocci show no particular arrangement to each 
other they are simply spoken of as cocci or micrococci. 

The foregoing divisions of the cocci are not complete, 
since there are other peculiarities of grouping, but 
those enumerated comprise the principal pathogenic 
micrococci. 

_ Bacteria may be said to be universally 

distributed, being found wherever animals 
and plants are. They are in the air we 
breath, and in the water we drink. The surface of 
the earth is covered with them; in fact the ground is 
their natural home, which should not surprise us since 
there organic matter is found in greatest abundance. 



46 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

Indeed, the source of the bacteria that are in the air 
and water is the ground. They are carried by the 
winds with dust, to which they adhere, and by water 
flowing over the ground. A fact of great importance 
to be remembered, however, is that bacteria cannot 
rise from liquids that contain them even should a strong 
current of wind blow over the liquid. 

Upon our bodies bacteria are constantly present in 
large numbers, and in every cavity leading to the exterior, 
but in the tissues and glands of the healthy person they 
are never found. The number of bacteria upon the 
body bears a relationship to the cleanliness of the 
individual, yet even in the most cleanly they are never 
absent. 

In the same way the number of bacteria in any locality 
is likewise related to the number of persons, to the 
density of population, and to the efficiency of the 
measures practised in the disposal of waste. Any 
kind of organic matter, whether it be manure heaps, 
the waste from kitchens, or the dejecta and secretions 
of man and animals, furnishes appropriate food for 
these scavengers. The chief interest for us in this 
wide distribution of bacteria is the relationship of their 
presence to man and animals, especially in that it 
draws attention to the danger of contamination of the 
ground, the water, and food-stuffs from persons and 
animals suffering from bacterial diseases, and the 
spread in consequence of disease in this way. 



BACTERIOLOGY. 47 

The statement made a few lines above 
Ground, that "the natural home for bacteria is 

the ground" applies to bacteria in general, 
and as the saprophytes comprise the majority of bac- 
teria, it is to them chiefly that reference is made. 
Nevertheless, almost any pathogenic bacterium may 
find in the soil a favorable environment for a longer or 
shorter period ; and even in the event that multiplication 
cannot take place, the conditions may be such as to 
preserve its vitality unimpaired. Therefore, as a result 
of the careless disposal of infectious material and 
discharges, the soil is often contaminated by micro- 
organisms of a dangerous character. All pathogenic 
microbes in the soil are potentially dangerous, yet the 
possibilities for them doing harm is not the same for 
each, since it depends upon the species of micro-organ- 
ism, the physical environments of the soil, and the 
purposes for which the soil is used. It should always 
be remembered that when a soil is contaminated with 
infectious matter, the bacteria present in it will, in dry 
weather, be carried into the air with dust, and in that 
way may find their way into our lungs or contaminate 
our foods. The most widely distributed bacterium 
in the air, and the most "generally dangerous, is the 
tubercle bacillus. The typhoid bacillus is the most 
frequent pollutor of wells and streams, although it 
may become a most dangerous infection in the air if 
the contamination of the soil is excessive and the 



48 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

hygienic conditions under which exposed individuals 
live are especially bad. Just such a condition as de- 
scribed pertained in the great military camps during the 
Spanish-American war, and the commission, appointed 
by the Surgeon- General of the army to report on the 
prevalence of typhoid fever among these troops, 
ascribed the stupendous morbidity to a few factors 
chiefly, not the least important of which was the pres- 
ence of typhoid baciUi in the dust surrounding the 
camps. 

Another way in which germs in the soil may infect 
persons, and this is true particularly of the typhoid 
bacillus and the cholera spirillum, is for the microbes 
to become attached to vegetables grown in the soil, 
especially if these vegetables are such as are usually 
consimied raw. However, whilst the majority of 
pathogenic bacteria in the soil may be regarded as 
accidental contaminations, there are a few whose 
natural habitat is the ground. These are the tetanus 
bacillus, the bacillus of gaseous edema, and the bacillus 
of malignant edema. In countries where bubonic 
plague is epidemic, the specific bacillus (bacillus 
pestis) seems to find a favorable environment in the 
ground. 

As has been said, water is most frequently 
Water, polluted by the washings from contami- 
nated soil. The pathogenic bacteria most 
feared in water or ice are the cholera spirillum and the 



BACTERIOLOGY. 49 

typhoid bacillus, on account of the danger of taking 
them into our intestinal tracts. Because cholera and 
typhoid fever are most frequently contracted from the 
drinking of polluted water, they are both spoken of as 
^^water-borne diseases.^^ The same micro-organisms 
are also common contaminators of other foods, the 
source of the contamination, as a rule, being also 
water, whether it be used to cleanse utensils, or a con- 
taminated stream in which water-cress or oysters are 
growing. 

The danger of air as a medium for the 
Air. distribution of pathogenic bacteria has 
been much exaggerated, in fact, even the 
number of all kinds of bacteria in the atmosphere is 
not as great as is popularly supposed. True! they are 
practically present everywhere, except at sea many 
miles from shore, and at great altitudes; yet they are 
never present in such abundance that "it rains bacteria." 
At one time the profession believed that the infectious 
agents of many diseases were carried in the air even 
considerable distances, a belief no longer held since the 
importance of the r61e that insects play in the trans- 
mission of disease has been recognized. 

The most widely distributed pathogenic micro- 
organism in the air is the tubercle bacillus, the cause of 
consumption, and a large variety of other ailments, 
such as hip-joint disease, caries of the spine, etc. 

Over 100,000 persons die annually from consumption 

4 



so INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

alone in United States, and it is estimated that there 
are over 2,ocx5,ooo of people afflicted with this disease 
in one form or another. AU of these suflFerers are 
expectorating billions of tubercle bacilli daily. Many 
of them are engaged in earning a livelihood, which takes 
them into offices and homes, the atmosphere of which 
they contaminate by coughing, sneezing, and expec- 
torating. The atmosphere of our cities is vitiated in 
the same way, but with less danger to others ; for in the 
open, through the action of sun-light, through heat, 
dilution, and other physical agencies, the virulence 
of the bacilli is gradually diminished, and eventually 
destroyed; finally the bacteria themselves are disinte- 
grated. But in confined spaces, little or no destruction 
of the bacilli takes place, so that there ensues in a short 
time an atmosphere ladened with tubercle bacilli, 
which is highly dangerous to everyone who breathes 
it. The dangerous condition of such an atmosphere 
is attested by the frequency of tuberculosis among 
successive tenants of a house that was the abode, for a 
period, of a consumptive. In quiet breathing, no 
tubercle bacilli are projected into the air, but in sneezing 
and coughing they are; and in the expectoration, esti- 
mates of their numbers cannot be placed too high. 
Thus it is that the tubercle bacilli find their way to 
the ground, become dry, are ground up with the dust, 
and with the latter are carried into the air and inhaled. 
The moral is obvious. 



BACTERIOLOGY. 



SI 



Pathogenic bacteria are either specific 
or non-specific according as they produce 
a specific or non-specific disease. In each 
of these classes are found cocci, bacilli, and 
spirilla. The following table contains the 
most important specific and non-specific bacteria: 



Specific 
AND Non- 
specific 
Bacteria. 



Non-specific Bacteria. Specific Bacteria. 



Micrococci 

Staphylococcus pyogenes 

aureus 
Staphylococcus pyogenes 

citreus 
Staphylococcus pyogenes 

albus 
Streptococcus pyogenes 

(Strep, erysipelatis) 
Pneumococcus 
Tetragenus albus 
Tetragenus citreus 

Bacilli 

Colon group 
Pneumo-bacillus group 
B. Pyocyaneus 
B. Malignant edema 
B. Aerogenes capsulatus 
B. Proteus vulgaris 

Specific Spirilla 
S. Recurrent fever 
S. Asiatic cholera 
Spirochaeta pallida (s3^hilis) 



Micrococci 

Gonococcus 

Diplococcus intracellularis 

meningitidis 
Micrococcus melitensis 

(Malta fever) 

Bacilli 

B. Anthrax 

B. Diphtheria 

B. Glanders 

B. Typhoid 

B. Influenza 

B. Tuberculosis 

B. Leprosy 

B. Pestis (bubonic plague) 

B. Tetanus (lock-jaw) 

B. Dysentery 



52 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

To separate one species of bacteria from 
Spores, another, bacteriologists find it necessary 

to note with the greatest accuracy the 
minutest diflFerences in size, shape, arrangement, 
motility or non-motility, etc., of the individuals of each 
species ; also the appearances of the species when 
viewed as masses with the naked eye. To do this the 
bacteria are grown upon various artificially prepared 
foods, called "culture media," which are valuable in 
bringing out the peculiarities of the different species. 
By means of cultures, the various species are also 
separated one from the other, and the individual 
characteristics studied. But these distinguishing char- 
acteristics can have little interest for anyone unless 
he works with bacteria in the laboratory. However, 
one biological characteristic is of very great importance 
to the practical sanitarian. Reference is made to a 
resting form of certain of the bacteria that is known as 
a spore. A spore is a glistening oval body into which a 
bacterium is converted when the environment is un- 
favorable to its growth. It corresponds to the seeds 
of a plant. The spore-form of bacteria represents 
more than a resting stage, however, since by virtue of 
an investing membrane, they are far more resistant to 
every destructive agency than the vegetative form. 
Thus while a temperature of 60° Centigrade (140° F.) 
kills the vegetative form of almost every bacterium in a 
few minutes, spores are able to withstand the boiling 



BACTERIOLOGY. S3 

point for an hour or longer. Likewise, while a three 
to five per cent solution of carbolic acid kills most bac- 
teria in half an hour, there are spores that can live for 
da3rs in the same strength of this acid. 

Obviously, therefore, the sporulating bacteria are of 
very great importance. Happily the number of sporu- 
lating bacteria is small, a fact which lessens the diffi- 
culty in disinfection, once these species are known. 
The principal sporogenous (spore-producing) bac- 
teria are the tetanus bacillus, the anthrax bacillus, the 
bacillus of malignant edema, the bacillus aerogenes 
capsulatus, and probably, the actinomyces bovis and 
Madurae. Fortunately, not one of these bacteria is the 
agent of a pestilential, epidemic disease. 

FACTORS NECESSARY TO THE GROWTH OF BACTERIA. 

The factors necessary to the growth of pathogenic 
bacteria are deserving of as much attention as the 
means devised for destroying them ; indeed, all methods 
which aim at destroying them (disinfection) must 
needs be faulty unless attention is paid to the conditions 
under which they flourish. The means are not always 
at hand to employ those chemical and physical agents 
that experience has taught may entirely be relied upon. 
Nor if they are, do the exigencies of the case, on account 
of the destructive action on fabrics of the most efficient 
disinfectants, or the bulk of the material to be disin- 
fected, permit of their use. Furthermore, dissemina- 



54 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

tion of the infectious agents may be so wide-spread as to 
make actual contact between the usual disinfectants 
and the infectious agents (an essential condition for 
satisfactory disinfection) absolutely impossible. Un- 
der the several circumstances enumerated, it is self- 
evident how valuable is the knowledge of the conditions 
most favorable to the growth of bacteria, since by 
removing favoring conditions and substituting harmful 
ones, we can make use of most excellent means for 
exterminating them. In the discussion which foUows, 
only the conditions favorable to the growth of patho- 
genic bacteria are treated. 

There are five factors principally concerned in the 
growth of bacteria, any alterations of which may be 
regarded as distinctly imfavorable; these relate to food, 
moisture, temperature, light, and relation to oxygen. 

Pathogenic bacteria require organic (albu- 
FooD. minous) material upon which to feed. 

It makes little difference what the source, 
whether vegetable or animal, solid or fluid, fresh or 
putrid, they are adapted to all kinds. The blood and 
tissues-juices of the animal body form an especially 
good medium. Besides being albuminous, the material 
must have an alkaline reaction. Nearly all bacteria 
grow best in a slightly alkaline medium, and high 
alkalinity, or moderate acidity, either sta)rs their growth 
or destro3rs them. Hence the strong acids and alkalies 
are true disinfectants. 



BACTERIOLOGY. 55 

Moisture is essential to the growth of 
MoisTxmE. bacteria, in fact, complete drying, except 

in the case of spores, is followed by death. 
Thus the spirilla of Asiatic cholera are killed in a few 
minutes by drying. However, too much reliance can- 
not be placed on this factor, since an infinitesimal 
amount of moisture sufiices to keep them alive indefi- 
nitely. 

The most favorable temperature for the 
Tempera- growth of pathogenic bacteria is that of 
''''^' our bodies, 98.6° F. (37° C). They will 
also readily multiply at lower temperatures if other 
circumstances permit. Thus the temperature of the 
ordinary summer day (70° F., 24° C.) is sufficient for 
rather rapid multiplication. Below this temperature, 
however, growth becomes slower as the temperature is 
reduced, and practically ceases at 16° C. (6o.8°F.). 
Above the temperature at which bacteria grow best 
(optimum temperature), only a few degrees suffice to 
prevent growth (43° C, 109.4° F.). 

Oxygen is another essential to the growth 
Oxygen, of bacteria, but there is considerable 

difference in the manner in which the 
various species obtain it. The majority grow best when 
oxygen, as found in the air, is supplied. A majority, 
however, will not grow in the presence of free oxygen, 
being compelled to obtain their oxygen from material 
in which it is in combination with other elements. 



INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 



56 

According as bacteria grow in the presence or absence 
of oxygen they are called aerobesor anaerobes respectively. 
Most of the aerobic bacteria grow as well without free 
oxygen as with it, for which reason they are spoken of as 
facultative anaerobes; but the contrary is not true; there 
are few facultative aerobes. 

All bacteria grow best when protected 
Light. from light. This statement holds good 

whether the light be natural or artificial. 
These five factors are the chief ones favorable to the 
growth of bacteria, and to the retention of their native 
characteristics and qualities. Variations in favoring 
factors, if not sufficient to destroy them, always tend to 
modify their functions (prevent growth, etc.), alter their 
qualities (diminish virulence), and, to a certain extent, 
produce variations in form. Broadly speaking, varia- 
tions acting in this way are antiseptics as opposed to 
disinfectants, which latter are the means used to destroy 
bacteria. Modifications in favoring factors are all 
the time in nature acting to reduce the rapidity of 
multiplication of bacteria, or to prevent it entirely; 
or by destroying their virulence to curtail their power 
to do harm. Most excellent use has been made of our 
knowledge of the grovrth of bacteria both in clinical 
and preventive medicine. In the treatment of wounds 
suspected of containing the tetanus bacillus, it is the 
practice to leave the wound exposed to the air, because 
we know that the tetanus bacillus will not grow m the 



1 



BACTERIOLOGY. 57 

presence of atmospheric air ; some physicians go a step 
farther and advise the spraying of such wounds with 
oxygen. In the preparation of some of the vaccines, 
bacteria whose virulence has been reduced or destroyed 
through subjecting them to unfavorable surroundings 
are used for the inoculations, a form of vaccination 
that is now being practised in typhoid fever and bubonic 
plague. Because cold retards bacterial growth, is one 
good reason for its use in inflammations. When the 
urine is alkaline, as is usually the case in inflammations 
of the bladder (cystitis), every effort is made to change 
the reaction to acid and thereby make the urine an un- 
favorable medium for the bacteria which cause the 
cystitis. 

AGENTS HARMFUL TO BACTERIA. 

Agents which prevent the growth and activity of 
bacteria without destroying them are called antiseptics; 
those that destroy them, disinfectants or germicides. 
Disinfection has as its object only the destruction of 
pathogenic microbes. When an object has been ren- 
dered free from all kinds of micro-organisms and their 
spores it is said to be sterile, and the process by which 
sterility is brought about is known as sterilization. 

A deodorant is a substance that has the 
Deodorant, power to destroy a noxious odor, usually 

by substituting its own in place of the 
other. A deodorant may or may not be a disinfectant. 



S8 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

Most of the disinfectants are also deodorants, but the 
reverse, it is to be remembered, is not true. Thus for- 
malin and carbolic acid are both deodorant and disin- 
fecting substances, whereas musk, a deodorant, has no 
disinfecting power. Bichloride of mercury, a most 
powerful disinfectant, is only a deodorant if it is allowed 
to act for a long period, for which reason it cannot be 
used for this purpose in the sick-room. All of the dis- 
infectants, when diluted, are also antiseptics. This 
is important, in as much as in the strengths that many 
of them are disinfectants, they are injurious to the 
tissues of the body. Bichloride of mercury 1-50,000 
is an efficient antiseptic, yet a strength of i-iooo is 
required to kill all bacteria and their spores. The 
same is true of formalin, which is antiseptic in a solution 
of 1-50,000, germicidal only in a strength of 3 to 5 
per cent. Substances like boracic acid, iodoform, etc., 
on the other hand, are purely antiseptic, even when 
employed in concentrated form. Strong solutions of 
sugar and salt, as used for domestic purposes to pre- 
serve various edibles from spoiling, are antiseptic but 
not germicidal. 

The prominent place occupied by insects 

as carriers of disease has given rise to a 

new interest in substances that will kill 

them. Interest centers chiefly in the discovery of an 

efficient substance that will be non-poisonous, yet 

generally applicable. A substance combining both of 



BACTERIOLOGY. 59 

these qualities has not yet been discovered. Substances 
used to kill insects are called insecticides. Nearly all 
the disinfectants are insecticides; formalin is a notable 
exception. The most important insecticides are given 
in a later chapter. 

Towards agents which have a harmful action upon 
them, i.e., either interfere with their growth (antisep- 
tics), or destroy them (disinfectants or germicides), 
bacteria exhibit distinct diflFerences in resistance — a 
characteristic which varies with the species. Species 
which produce spores, are not more resistant to injurious 
agencies when in the vegetative state, than are the 
ordinary non-sporulating bacteria. But in the form 
of spores their power to resist destruction is often 
marvelous. However, it is not only the sporogenous 
form which is difficult to deal with; there are a few 
species which, although they do not produce spores, 
are nevertheless almost as difficult to kill. The tubercle 
bacillus is one of these, and it is due to this fact, in con- 
junction with the universal prevalence of tuberculosis, 
that the tubercle bacillus has a wider distribution in 
nature than any other specific pathogenic micro-or- 
ganism. 

The most wide-spread destruction of bacteria is 
brought about through natural forces. Where actual 
destruction is not accomplished, the same influences so 
modify their characteristics as to render them inert. 
It is in this way that pathogenic bacteria are robbed of 



6o INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

their virulence and made harmless. Undoubtedly 
the limitation of infectious diseases, which otherwise 
would be impossible of control, is brought about in this 
manner. Nature's means are simple, yet all-pervading, 
wherefore she accomplishes more than the combined 
efforts of men. And her forces are effective, and always 
at our disposal, so that it behooves us to learn her ways 
and profitably make use of her bounty. The forces 
which nature employs are chiefly light, drying, dilution, 
cold, and S3mibiosis (association). 

Among the natural agencies destructive to 
Light. bacteria, sun-light occupies the first place. 

It is by far the greatest destroyer of germ- 
life. Few microbes can live in direct sun-light many 
hours, the pathogenies being especially susceptible to its 
influence. Its destructive influence is exerted whether 
the bacteria are in a dry state, or in a liquid. Moreover, 
it acts upon them whether the solution is clear, or is as 
foul as sewage. For example, only twelve hours' 
exposure to direct sun-light is required to render sewage 
free from bacteria, i.e., sterile. It also kills spores, if 
the exposure is longer. 

Sun-light has the power of acting directly 
Dryness, upon bacteria in liquids, as has just been 

stated. But it has another action equally 
important which enhances its disinfecting powers to a 
point scarcely equaled by any gaseous disinfectant, 
namely, drying. With the exception of spores, com- 



BACTERIOLOGY. 6i 

plete drying prax:tically kills all pathogenic bacteria. 
This statement, however, is only true where complete 
drying is accomplished, a matter that we can never be 
sure of unless we control the situation as is done in the 
laboratory. 

Besides sun-light and drying, ozone 
Ozone. (nascent oxygen) also takes part in the 

destruction of bacterial life. But as this 
substance as formed in nature occurs only in small 
quantities, its importance in this respect is difficult to 
measure. More ozone is found in the country than in 
cities, a factor that undoubtedly contributes to the 
greater healthfuhiess of rural surroundings. 

Cold, we have already learned, is unfavor- 
CoLD. able to the growth of bacteria. At the 

freezing temperature (32° F., 0° C.) most 
bacteria succimib. However, some species exhibit con- 
siderable resistance to freezing. This is true of the 
micro-organisms of t)rphoid fever (t)rphoid bacillus) 
and Asiatic cholera (spirillum of Asiatic cholera), 
epidemics of both of which diseases have been traced 
to ice as the source of the infection. 

Dilution, or the diminution by dilution, of 
Dilution, the number of bacteria per volume of 

material in which they are contained, is 
also accomplished by nature. How great a benefit 
this is to man will be better explained in a succeeding 



62 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

chapter. Here reference is only made to the fact that, 
as the number of bacteria which get into the body plays 
a highly important part in the production of disease, 
adequate dilution of infectious agents may make them 
innocuous. Hence one value of dilution is evident. 
Another eflFect of dilution is to separate the individual 
microbes, and thereby permit of closer and more 
thorough contact with them of the natural destructive 
agencies. In practical disinfection dilution of the 
infectious material is for this reason always practised. 
If the material is semi-solid it is diluted with a disin- 
fectant in which it is soluble ; or it is broken up, if not 
soluble, to permit of closer contact of the disinfectant 
with as much of the material as is possible. If liquids 
are to be disinfected, either a liquid disinfectant is used, 
or one that is soluble in the solution to be disinfected. 
In any case, sufficient time (one hour for the disinfec- 
tants in common use) is given for penetration. 

By symbiosis is understood the living 

Symbiosis . ,i r j«rc j. • r 

/ • ^- X together of different species of organisms 
(association). . ° ^ ^ ^ 

m the same medium. 
It further implies that they are mutually helpful and 
beneficial. Among bacteria in nature a struggle for 
existence is constantly taking place, which in conjunc- 
tion with other natural forces serves to keep their num- 
bers within limits. Of the two classes of bacteria, 
parasites and saprophytes, the saprophytes are the more 
nimierous and by far the hardier, so that when they are 



BACTERIOLOGY. 63 

growing side by side with pathogenies, the latter get 
less food and suflFer from the excretory products of the 
former- Hence in the process of putrefaction, as of 
sewage or of diseased carcasses, self-purification is 
largely brought about by the saprophytes crowding out 
the weaker pathogenies. 

Another natural force tending to the 
BACTERicmAL dcstruction of bacterial life is the bacteri- 
Power of cidal^ action of the body-juices of all 
BoDY-juicEs. living things. The number of bacteria 

which rest upon our bodies, and even get 
into the interior, is incalculable, yet very few do us 
harm on account of this property of living matter. 
This protective power of the body when displayed 
against a disease is called immunity. 

The destructive action of heat upon bac- 
Heat. teria is so well known that it often comes as 

a surprise that, in disinfection, more con- 
fidence should be placed in chemicals. As a matter of 
fact, there is no more efficient disinfectant than heat 
if properly applied. It is also the cheapest. With few 
exceptions, bacteria are killed in a few minutes at a 
temperature considerably below the boiling point of 
water; and at the boiling point at once. Yet it is a 
common practice for both ph)rsicians and nurses to put 
a family to considerable expense for chemical disinfec- 
tants in a case of typhoid fever, for example, when heat 

'*' Bacteria destroying. 



64 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

applied directly, or several times the quantity of boiling 
water added to the material to be disinfected (stools, 
for instance), and the mixture allowed to stand an hour, 
is as trustworthy a practice as the use of any disinfec- 
tant; and far more so than many chemicals whose 
virtues are highly extolled in newspapers and medical 
journals. 

We have seen that although the optimum temperature 
for the growth of pathogenic bacteria is that of the body 
(98.6° F.), they will multiply at a much lower tempera- 
ture. Above the temperature of the body, however, 
the limit is small, since growth ceases at 109.4° F. (43°C.). 
At 140° F. (60° C.) the vegetative forms of practically 
all bacteria are destroyed if applied for ten minutes, 
and the time required to destroy them diminishes as 
the temperature rises. At 212° F. (100° C.) as we have 
stated, they are killed immediately. The tubercle 
bacillus, although only occurring in a vegetative form 
(i.e., does not form spores), is an exception in that 
boiling for five minutes is required to destroy it. 

There are a large number of substances 
Chemicals, which have a detrimental effect upon 

bacteria, some merely inhibiting their 
growth (antiseptics), others destroying them (disinfec- 
tants). Their nimiber is too great to enumerate. Those 
that interest us because they are useful in rendering 
infectious matter harmless will be given in a later 
chapter. 



BACTERIOLOGY. 65 

Cleanliness is an eflScient weapon to 
Cleanliness, employ against bacteria. Too much can- 
not be said in its favor. Through it we 
can dispose of the most essential factor in the growth 
of bacteria, namely, organic matter. Where organic 
matter does not exist, bacteria cannot live and multiply. 
Material of any kind, containing bacteria, is said 
to be septic; when free from bacteria, aseptic. In 
practical work, e.g., surgery, objects and persons are 
rendered bacteria-free either through the use of antisep- 
tics and disinfectants, or by mechanical cleansing with 
soap and water. The two methods are distinguished 
as the antiseptic, and aseptic methods respectively. 



CHAPTER III. 

PHENOMENA OF INFECTION. 

There are two view-points from which the production 

of an infectious disease must always be studied, viz., 

(i) the infecting micro-organism, and (2) the state of 

the body at the time the infection occurs. Apart from 

injuries and direct poisonings, there are no independent 

causes of disease. When we say an infectious disease 

is due to this or that micro-organism, we are making 

a statement which expresses only a fraction of the true 

sequence of events, since unassisted, infectious agents 

probably never, imder the ordinary conditions of life, 

bring about disease. To be sure, their presence in an 

infectious process is indispensable, yet the mere fact 

of their presence counts for naught unless the body 

has been prepared, so to speak, for their invasion. 

Furthermore, even in the event that the body be in a 

most favorable condition for infection, there are several 

conditions which micro-organisms must fulfill before 

they can exercise their specific functions. For the 

foregoing reasons, therefore, an infectious disease is the 

result of the co-existence of a chain of fortuitous phenom- 

66 



PHENOMENA OF INFECTION. 67 

ena which concern the body on the one hand, and the 
infectious agents on the other. To illustrate : We say 
that the pneumococcus is the cause of pneumonia 
because this particular micro-organism is found in the 
characteristic expectoration during life, and in the 
lungs after death. Unquestionably, it is a necessary 
factor in the disease ; but is it the sole factor ? We have 
only to examine the facts in the case to discover that 
it is not. In the first place, practically everyone, even 
in health, harbors the pneumococcus in his mouth. 
In the second place, pneumonia in robust individuals 
invariably follows either fatigue and exposure to in- 
clement weather, or exposure and over-indulgence in 
intoxicants; often a combination of all three factors 
precedes the onset. In the less robust, e.g., those 
suffering from chronic ailments — (a condition in which 
susceptibility to pneumonia is especially marked) it is 
the pre-existing sub-normal state of the health which 
permits the micro-organisms to invade the deeper air- 
passages and produce the disease. Again: It is a mat- 
ter of common observation that of a number of indi- 
viduals exposed to the same infectious disease not all 
are attacked, and that in those susceptible the disease 
presents extraordinary variations as regards its mild- 
ness or severity. If the microbe were the sole factor 
concerned, all exposed individuals would be attacked, 
and all attacked would suffer to the same degree; a 
thing which everyone knows never happens. More- 



68 Il^^FECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

over, a person may resist the action of a pathogenic 
agent at one time and fall victim to it at another. 

INFECTIOUS AGENTS IN DISEASE. 

From the view-point of infectious agents there are 
five conditions to be fulfilled before they can provoke 
disease : 

(i) They must be present in sufl&cient numbers. 

(2) They must reach (what is for them) their portal 
of entry. 

(3) They must be virulent. 

(4) In the case of certain pathogenic agents, disease 
can result only when the agent is accompanied by one 
or more other micro-organisms, or when accompanied 
by a foreign body. 

(5) If a disease is conmiunicated exclusively by 
an insect, obviously the presence of that insect is an 
essential condition. 

Contrary to a wide-spread belief, there is 
Number, no disease which a single infectious agent, 

acting alone, can produce; that is to say, 
one micro-organism of a certain species, however viru- 
lent it may be, is incapable of provoking disease. 
Experimentally it has been found that even in animals 
very susceptible to them, it takes large numbers of a 
particular micro-organism to bring about characteristic 
results. In diseases occurring among persons we have 
no way of determining the number of germs that pri- 



PHENOMENA OF INFECTION. 69 

marily enter the body, yet a wealth of facts gleaned 
through experiments upon animals leads us to conclude 
their numbers must be large. Clinical observations 
also furnish some data in support of this view. In 
cases where long and tedious operations are performed, 
a wound is often exposed to the air for hours without ill 
effects following. Certainly no one believes that 
during the time of exposure and manipulation bacteria 
do not soil the wound. On the contrary, we know they 
do; but the reason harm only occasionally results from 
those that enter is attributed to the fact that either they 
are present in insufficient numbers and are of .low 
virulence, or the vital forces of the patient are sufl&cient 
to destroy them. Similar observations are made by 
physicians in the repair of injuries in which either 
aseptic or antiseptic precautions are utterly impossible. 
Thus in the practice of mid-wifery, for example, al- 
though such unfortunate surroundings are quite com- 
mon, cases of puerperal fever (child-bed fever) are 
so infrequent as to excite comment. Indeed, puerperal 
fever occurs occasionally under conditions in which 
the surroundings are ideal, probably through the ful- 
fillment of the tHird condition above given, viz., extra- 
ordinary virulence of the germs. 

A singular peculiarity of pathogenic micro- 
PoRTAL OF organisms is that in order to provoke dis- 
Entry. ease, they must find lodgment in or upon 

that portion of the body which offers the 



70 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

least resistance to their attack. The tissues of the body 
vary in susceptibility to microbic invasion, the differ- 
ence having a relation to the species of organism. Thus 
there are certain bacteria which can exert a specific 
action only when they gain entrance into the intestinal 
tract ; to this class belong the typhoid bacillus and the 
spirillum of Asiatic cholera. There are bacteria, on the 
other hand, such as the tetanus bacillus, the gas bacillus, 
and the common bacteria of suppurations, which may 
be swallowed with impunity, in fact often are, their 
characteristic effects being produced only by entrance 
into a wound of the skin or a mucous membrane. 
Similarly, the diphtheria bacillus has no effect upon the 
imbroken skin, nor upon the mucous membranes of the 
stomach or intestines, although, in the disease, countless 
numbers are swallowed ; it selects per force the mucous 
membranes of the nose, the pharjmx, and the posterior 
nares chiefly, less often those of the conjunctiva and 
the vulva. 

The channel of entry, therefore, occupies an impor- 
tant position when the subject of a micro-organism's 
pathogenicity is under consideration, since upon it will 
depend the result of the presence of a'pathogenic agent 
whether the latter does or does not satisfy every other 
condition necessary for its specific action. 

The real power of every species of micro- 
ViRULENCE. organism which produces disease lies in 

its ability to secrete one or more toxins. 



PHENOMENA OF INFECTION. 71 

When it has this power it is said to be virulent. In 
another chapter the remarkable inconstancy of the 
toxicity of micro-organisms has been considered (vide 
p. 41). That virulence in bacteria is an essential 
phenomenon in disease-production has been abundantly 
confirmed by the finding, in their propitious channels 
of entry, of various pathogenic micro-organisms m 
perfectly healthy individuals, the organisms so found 
being commonly non-virulent varieties. 

All pathogenic bacteria vary in respect to virulence, 
and, as has been explained in a previous chapter, are 
on this account divided into those which are virulent 
and those which are non-virulent. However, it should 
be remembered that non-virulent bacteria are not 
without danger to individuals who carry them, and to 
other persons to whom they may be conveyed, since 
they may acquire virulence either before or after trans- 
ference, and provoke disease. 

Microbic association in disease is of 
MicROBic common occurrence, the resulting mixed 
Association infection usually being severer than an 
(symbiosis), unmixed one. Thus in diphtheria, the 

diphtheria bacillus is often associated 
with the streptococcus pyogenes or the staphylococcus 
pyogenes aureus; the typhoid bacillus with the bdcUlus 
coli communis, a common inhabitant of the intestinal 
tract. There are some bacteria, however, which cannot 
exercise their power without the co-operation of another 



72 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

bacterium. To this class belongs the tetanus bacillus, 
which, being an obligate anaerobic bacillus (cannot 
grow in the presence of free oxygen), is compelled to 
work with another germ that, by absorbing the oxygen, 
makes the surroundings favorable for its growth. 
This bacillus also works mischief chiefly when accom- 
panied by a foreign body, as for example a sliver, powder- 
grain, etc., or where there has been much laceration 
of tissues. The same thing is true of the bacillus 
aerogenes capstdatus. 

There are a few infectious diseases, such 
Conveyance as malarial fever, yellow fever, and filaria- 
BY Insects, sis, in which the infectious agents are 

exclusively conveyed by insects. All such 
diseases are due to animal parasites, which for com- 
plete development require two hosts, man and an insect. 
Each host nourishes the parasite during one phase of 
its growth only, so that in order to reach maturity the 
latter must pass consecutively from one host to another. 
Furthermore, since parasites are restricted to especial 
hosts, the presence of an appropriate host for each one 
is imperative if they are to be perpetuated. Therefore 
it follows that the communicability of a disease by an 
insect is only possible in the event of the presence of 
that particular variety of insect. So circumscribed is 
the world of parasitism! For instance, yellow fever 
is conveyed by only one genus of mosquito (stegomyia 



PHENOMENA OF INFECTION. 73 

fasciata), malarial fever by a few varieties of another 
(anopheles), etc. 

THE BODY m RELATION TO INFECTIONS. 

We have just considered the exacting conditions 
which an infectious agent must fulfill to provoke disease. 
The fulfillment of these conditions, however, only 
meets the requirements in so far as the micro-organism 
is concerned, and therefore presents but one side of the 
problem; the other side, the position that the body 
occupies in relation to infections, is equally important, 
and it is to this phase of the question that we now turn. 
A few lines above, this statement was made, "it is a 
matter of common observation that, of a number of 
individuals exposed to the same infectious disease, not 
all are attacked; and in those susceptible, the disease 
presents extraordinary variations as regards its mildness 
or severity. If the microbe were the sole factor con- 
cerned, all exposed persons would be attacked, and all 
taking the disease would suffer to the same degree; a 
thing which everyone knows never happens. Moreover, 
a person may resist the action of a pathogenic agent at 
one time, and fall victim to it at another." The ques- 
tion that naturally presents itself is, what brings about 
such radical differences in the vulnerability of individ- 
uals to infectious agents ? That it is not always conse- 
quent upon modifications in the agents, we know from 
observations upon patients, and experiments upon 



74 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

animals. To account for it, there is obviously some 
subtle difference in the vital processes of different 
individuals, and in the same person at different times. 

Every healthy person is by nature endowed with the 
means of combating disease, but his natural defenses, 
while they may be strengthened, may also be weakened 
by those forces and influences which surround him. 
Nor before the tribimal, disease, are all men bom equal, 
since progenitors may transmit to their offspring con- 
stitutions defective in defensive force. Furthermore, 
during the constructive (infancy and childhood) and 
degenerative (old age) periods of life the protective 
forces are, on the other hand, weakened through imma- 
turity, on the other, by the fact that they are declining 
with age. Therefore, to environment, heredity, and 
age, must we look for an explanation of any imperfec- 
tion in our natural resistance to disease. 

Predisposition. The absence of resistance to 
disease, i.e., susceptibility, has been given the compre- 
hensive title predisposition, and we characterize as 
predisposing every influence or cause which tends to 
weaken the vital forces and therefore predisposes to 
disease. In every infection such causes always play 
an important r61e, usually more important than the 
infectious agents, a fact to which too little heed is given 
in the hurly-burly of life. The attitude of the world 
in this respect is not unlike its greater faith in the cura- 
tive powers of drugs, than in a disciplinary regulation 



PHENOMENA OF INFECTION. 



75 



of its habits. If we should s)mibolize infectious agents 
as a spider, and humanity as a fly, then the web would 



Infectious 
Diseases 



Infectious 



Agents I 



f Bacteria 
(Fungi 
Protozoa 



Heredity 



Race 

Family 

Individual 



Predisposing Environ- 



Region 



I Climate 



Causes ' 



ment 



I Insects 
Season 
Occupation 
Poor Food or Fasting 
Unhygienic Surroundings 
Previous Disease 
Poisons (Alcohol, etc.) 
Loss of 

Blood 

Shock 
Laceration 



Injuries 
and 



Operations 



of Tissues 



.Age 



Infancy 
Childhood 
Adolescence 
LOld Age 



\ 



76 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

represent predisposing causes, for only when the fly 
is entangled in the web doe3 the spider attack its victim. 
It will be observed that this conception of disease 
does not undervalue the part that infectious agents play 
as direct or exciting causes of disease, but it further 
recognizes fully the preponderating influence of those 
accessory, auxiliary, or predisposing causes without 
which the animate agents cannot act. The analytical 
chart here shown aims to elucidate graphically this 
view. To be sure, all of the diverse elements represented 
are not operative at the same time in any infectious 
disease; but one or several always are, and these act in 
combination with the infectious agents. 

Heredity ^^^^"^^^g ^o the chart, it will be seen that 
there are three sub-divisions to heredity, 
viz., race, family, and individual. 

Our knowledge of race as influencing 
Race. infection is of comparatively recent date. 
This knowledge, besides having an impor- 
tant bearing upon etiology, is of historical interest in 
explaining the errors of judgment which in the past led 
to great crimes. In many notable epidemics the Jews 
were singled out for persecution, because they escaped 
the prevailing scourge, their immimity being ascribed 
to a special knowledge of the epidemic disease. During 
cholera epidemics, the relationship to drinking-water 
which was recognized, they were accused of poisoning 
wells, and the brutal ferocity of insensate mob-violence 



PHENOMENA OF INFECTION. 77 

was visited upon them. But the dispassionate reason- 
ing of scientific investigation has acquitted them of 
those charges by explaining their insusceptibility to 
infection as a peculiarity of the Hebrew race. Thus, 
by far, fewer Jews are victims of pulmonary tubercu- 
losis than Gentiles, and Asiatic cholera is so rare among 
them as to lead some authors to doubt that it ever 
occurs. Furthermore, they suffer less severely from 
other infections, and less from animal parasites, than 
other races. However, it must be confessed that in the 
case of the Jews (and in that of any other race, for that 
matter), racial characteristics do not explain entirely 
the absence of predisposition. We should err greatly 
did we fail to take into account a race's habits and 
customs. For instance, other things equal, the Jews 
are better housed, eat more wholesome food, are more 
cleanly in their habits, take better care of their children, 
and are less given to intoxicants, than their Gentile 
neighbors ; while all of them are still influenced more or 
less by the Mosaic laws. Their standard of life, if 
adopted by any people, would tend to strengthen its 
vital resistance and, in some at least, would lead to 
the establishment of the antithesis of predisposition, 
namely, immunity. 

Another factor which exercises its influence upon a 
race's susceptibility, or immunity, is the length of time 
it has been in contact with a disease. The first con- 
flict of a race with an infectious disease often proves 



INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 




highly disastrous, as witness the terrible ravages of 
measles among the natives of the Faroe Islands in 1846, 
when out of 7,782 people, 6,000 were attacked; and also 
the invasion of the Fiji Islands in 1875 by the same 
malady, during which 40,000 of its 150,000 inhabitants 
died. Nor is it necessary to cite examples of distant 
peoples; in our own country we have an object lesson 
in the Negro and the Indian. The Negro is three times 
as susceptible to tuberculosis as the white inhabitants; 
and the North American Indian has been well-nigh 
exterminated by this "great white plague." Generally 
speaking, the longer the contact of a race with an 
infectious disease, the less is its predisposition to it. 
Tuberculosis well illustrates this point in the respect 
that the most ancient race, the Jews, suffers least from 
it; other races, in inverse ratio to their antiquity. 
Diminution in susceptibility through contact is prob- 
ably brought about by large numbers of individuals in 
successive generations surviving an infection, and 
transmitting to succeeding generations their own individ- 
ual resistance, together with that acquired by passing 
through an attack of the disease. Yet after every 
factor, such as surroundings, food, contact with a 
disease, etc., has lieen considered, there is still wanting 
an explanation of the fact that when two races hve 
side by side, under precisely similar circumstances, 
the one suffers from an infectious disease to a greater 
extent than does the other. Upon no other grounds than 



1 



J 



PHENOMENA OF INFECTION. 79 

racial peculiarity, can this be explained. Animals also 
exhibit the same peculiarity in susceptibility to disease. 
Among cattle, Jerseys are more susceptible to tuber- 
culosis than other breeds. Dogs are practically immune 
to it, a fact which probably explains the high position 
dog-fat holds among the ignorant as a remedy for tuber- 
culosis. At a laboratory at which the writer once 
worked, and where many dogs were used for experi- 
mental purposes, the janitor sold large quantities of 
the fat to a local charlatan who in turn disposed of it as 
a specific for consumption. It must not be supposed, 
however, that racial immunity, such as is frequently 
the case with individuals, is ever perfect. There are 
always families and individuals whose immunity is 
diminished by marriage and environment, and the 
whole race is subject to those diseases which are inci- 
dental to age. 

As the family partakes of the characteris- 
Family. tics of the race, family predisposition is 

subject to the same general rules as de- 
scribed for races, with the exception, that marriage 
between members of different races by blending the 
vital forces may either increase or decrease the power 
to combat disease. A similar result follows the union 
of persons of the same family; and the great danger 
of a summation of highly susceptible strains has led, 
in many states, to the wise enactment of a law against 
consanguineous marriages. An extension of this law 



8o INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

to include inebriates and consumptives has many 
arguments in its favor. 

From the view-point of the body, individual 
iNDivmuAL. predisposition is the principal factor in 

the spread of infectious diseases. With 
few exceptions it is operative in every case, so that the 
study of the various conditions which lead to it involves 
considerations of the highest importance to physicians, 
nurses, and sanitarians generaUy. Individual predis- 
position may either be inherited or acquired. If inher- 
ited, it is seldom to any particular infection but to all. 
We no longer believe in an inherited predisposition 
to a special disease, as was formerly the case with tuber- 
culosis, but rather in the inheritance of an especially 
suscepitible state of the body-tissues which predisposes 
to all manner of infections. Not alone are the children 
of the consumptive markedly prone to consumption 
but also the children of all parents who at the time of 
conception were either in an impoverished state of 
health from disease, or whose vital resistance was 
depressed by alcohol, drugs, or by deprivations of one 
kind or another. The reason that the consumptive's 
oflFspring has fewer chances of escaping tuberculosis 
than the child of the non-tuberculous, is because the 
atmosphere of its home is, in the majority of cases, 
through ignorance, vitiated by the germs of its parent's 
malady. Besides a general predisposition such as we 
have been discussing, a predisposition to local disorders 



PHENOMENA OF INFECTION. 8i 

is also recognized. This relates to a susceptibility of 
certain organs or tissues as a result of other concurrent 
infections. Thus, rheumatism predisposes to infections 
of the heart; diabetes, to suppurative inflammations 
(carbimcles) and gangrene of the skin and subcutaneous 
tissues; enlarged tonsils and adenoids to colds, tonsil- 
litis, and probably diphtheria. 

Under environment is included all those 

Environ- ^ i • n -i i • i 

external mfluences by which man is sur- 

rounded which, by exercising a deleterious 
influence upon health, predispose him to disease. 
Among such influences are region, season, occupation, 
food, unhygienic surroundings, previous disease, poisons, 
injuries, etc. 

Locality may act as a predisposing cause 
Region, in many ways, all of which may be grouped 

under two heads, viz., (i) climate, and (2) 
physical conditions. 

Climatic conditions, as is well known. 
Climate, differ widely in various parts of the world, 

from which arise for the most part great 
differences in plant and animal life. Moreover, practi- 
cally everywhere, there are seasonal variations more or 
less pronounced, which have their corresponding in- 
fluence upon all living things. In tropical and sub- 
tropical countries where a high mean temperature and 
a maximum amount of moisture predominate, the 
luxuriance of the foliage and the multiformity of animal 



82 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

life never cease to excite the admiration and wonder of 
the traveler. While from the temperate zone, in a 
direction away from the equator, vegetable and animal 
life grows less and less abundant and flourishes for a 
briefer period of each year, as we approach the frigid 
zones. These diversities in climate have given origin 
to forms of life peculiar to themselves, and attention is 
directed to this most obvious phenomenon because 
similar infltiences play their part in the prodtiction of 
disease the world over. The living agents of disease 
are either animal or vegetable, and are therefore sub- 
ject to the same physical laws as govern forms higher 
than they. Just as there are plants and animals indig- 
enous to the several regions, so do we find pathogenic 
agents in one region that are not encountered in another. 
Likewise, as many plants native to temperate zones 
outgrow in size and color all semblance to the original 
when cultivated under tropical atmospheric conditions, 
so do certain diseases common' in temperate latitudes, 
where they are relatively mild, assume in the tropics a 
virulence that makes of them a terrible scourge. But 
here the simile of flora and fauna, and disease, ends. 
Tropical plants, unless carefully nurtured, do not 
prosper when transplanted in temperate climates; 
whereas tropical diseases do, if circumstances are the 
least propitious, when they are introduced. The 
microscopic agents of disease are less sensitive in some 
respects to ph)rsical agents than plants, and moreover 



PHENOMENA OF INFECTION. 83 

are capable of ready adaptation to new environment. 
Conquest, improved methods of travel, and shorter 
routes, have brought the tropics to the very doors of 
Western nations, with the result, that in the great 
commercial benefits accruing from easy intercourse, 
there has come a menace in the guise of disease. Here 
and there tropical diseases have already been introduced, 
and while the number of such instances is insignificant, 
and they have been successfully combated, it has excited 
alarm. And well might it! Europe has a number 
of times been over-run with Oriental plagues. Up to 
the present these problems have been dealt with chiefly 
in those countries where such diseases prevail, but who 
can say when from a single imported case a herculean 
task in sanitation and preventive medicine will not 
confront some nation ? In temperate latitudes, tropical 
heat is seasonable for one or more months each year, 
a time during which the way is open for the spread of 
an exotic disease. This danger the nations are cogni- 
zant of, and special commissions are investigating such 
diseases in those regions where they are endemic. 
Whenever anything is discovered which bids fair to 
prove valuable as a preventive, it is at once given a prac- 
tical test, since it is obvious that the only real safe-guard 
the peoples of temperate climates have against foreign 
diseases, is to stamp them out in their home-country. 
All of the nations have likewise founded schools of 
"Tropical Medicine," where the etiology and sanitary 



84 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

control of tropical diseases are studied, and where the 
same is taught to physicians and nurses whose duty 
it may be, at some time, to cope with them. 

An ever present danger to both natives and foreigners 
in tropical coimtries is intestinal diseases. The climatic 
conditions predispose to congestion of the abdominal 
viscera, which predisposes the latter to infections. 
Even in the absence of infectious agents, chronic 
engorgement may give rise to lasting injury in one or 
another organ. The liver is the organ commonly 
aflFected in this way, a chronic enlargement with result- 
ing torpidity in functioning, frequently making the 
unfortunate sufferer an invalid for life. Lay writers, 
particularly English authors, have long recognized this 
affliction, and very properly held it responsible for 
many disagreeable traits of character. The enlarged 
liver of the retired East Indian official so often referred 
to by Thackeray, is therefore not a mere creation of 
the novelist's, but foimded upon fact. But the chief 
interest for us in the congestion of the viscera due to 
intense heat, is in the fact that it predisposes to a host 
of infectious and animal intestinal parasites with which 
the tropics abound. Nearly all of these agents get into 
the body through the drinking-water, or from eating 
raw fruits and vegetables, and the infectious disorders 
which they excite are either of the intestines, or the 
intestines and liver. The commonest infectious disease 
of the tropics is dysentery, of which there are two 



PHENOMENA OF INFECTION. 85 

varieties, namely, (i) bacillary dysentery, due to a 
bacillus (bacillus dysentericB, Shiga), the other, (2) 
amoebic dysentery, due to the amoeba dysenteruB, an 
animal organism. Next in importance to these infec- 
tions are various disorders resulting from animal para- 
sites. By exercising great caution in the matter of food 
and drink, one may avoid the infectious and parasitic 
intestinal disorders, if he cannot those solely dependent 
upon climate. From the latter, too, it is not impossible 
to escape, if one abstains entirely from alcoholics and 
other excesses which tend to increase the amount of 
blood in organs already overfilled, and if occasional 
visits to cooler climates be made. The most rigid 
adherence to the laws of health, combined with such 
as are especially adapted to a hot country, must be 
followed. These measures if carried out, and provided 
the individual is free from disease in the beginning, 
will ensure the same average health in a tropical as in 
a temperate country. 

The degree of warmth, the amount of 
Physical moisture, and the physical conditions of a 
CoNDrrioNs. country, all have a bearing upon predis- 
position, because they supply an essential 
environment for the perpetuation of forms of life which 
either cause disease, or transmit it. Besides the vege- 
table micro-organisms, bacteria and moulds, there are 
other microscopic and larger forms of life belonging to 
the animal kingdom which produce disease. Among 



86 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

these, protozoa, the lowest form of animal life, are of 
prime importance. Then there are flukes, worms, 
and insects. Of the pathogenic protozoa known, 
nearly all depend upon suctorial insects for transmission 
from one person to another. The r61e of insects in 
the production of disease is large, forming a highly 
important branch of medicine; and it is destined to 
become much larger. Two kinds of transmission of 
pathogenic micro-organisms by living agents are recog- 
nized, (i) in which the insect is merely an accidental 
carrier of the micro-organism; (2) in which the insect 
acts as host for the micro-organism during one phase 
of its life-cycle. Where the insect is an accidental 
carrier of the microbe, the surface of its body, or its 
excrement, has been contaminated by feeding upon 
infectious material. Under such circumstances a 
disease is transmitted either through the soiling of a 
wound, or through the contamination of an article of 
diet. While living upon the insect no increase in 
numbers of the pathogenic agent takes place. Bac- 
terial (and possibly a few protozoan) diseases are fre- 
quently transmitted in this way. In a previous chapter 
the wide-spread prevalence of typhoid fever in the 
United States military camps during the Spanish- 
American war was mentioned to illustrate the trans- 
mission of bacteria by flies. Besides flies, ants, bed- 
bugs, fleas, and ticks, may also accidentally carry 
bacteria, and besides typhoid fever, insects are believed 



PHENOMENA OF INFECTION. 87 

to transmit at times other bacterial diseases such as 
Asiatic cholera, bubonic plague, leprosy, tuberculosis, 
small-pox, etc. 

But where an insect acts as host for a pathogenic 
agent, an entirely diflferent condition is presented. Here, 
while the contamination of the host is accidental in so 
far as the latter is concerned, it is a necessary sequence 
on the part of the pathogenic agent. Agents of this 
class are alternately parasitic upon human beings and 
insects. Upon each host a supplementary develop- 
ment begun in one is continued in the other. In no 
other way can growth from egg to adult (life-cycle) be 
accomplished. In addition to this remarkable pro- 
vision, each agent, through the workings of a fixed bio- 
logical law, is peculiarly restricted to especial hosts 
without which it cannot develop. It follows, therefore, 
that the propagation of diseases by insect-hosts is 
absolutely contingent upon the presence of that partic- 
ular species of insect which is the agent's natural host. 
Hosts may belong to the class of suctorial (biting) 
insects, or to such as are likely to get into our food or 
drink. One instance of a disease due to a protozoan 
which is transmitted by an insect (mosquito), is fur- 
nished by malarial fever ; another, by sleeping-sickness 
(trypanosomiasis), of which the African stinging fly 
glossina is the host. 

Among larger organisms which themselves produce 
pathological conditions are insects, flukes, worms, etc. 



r 
I 



88 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

Most of these have as yet a circumscribed distribution, 
so that the diseases which they cause are hmited to 
certain regions. Examples of such diseases are parasitic 
hemoptysis (puhnonary distomiasis), which is found 
ahnost exclusively in China, Japan, and Formosa; 
bilharziosis (endemic or Egyptian hsematuria), pre- 
vailing particularly in Egypt, North Africa, Arabia and 
Persia; hook-worm disease (ankylostomiasis, uncin- 
ariasis), common in Porto Rica, Southern United States, 
the Philippine Islands and Egypt; guinea-worm disease 
(dracontiasis), occurring principally in Africa, East 
Indies, and Panama. These examples suffice to show 
the relationship between insects and disease on the one 
hand, and regions and insects, upon the other. It is 
because the physical characteristics in so large a measure 
determine the insect and animal life of a country that 
we include them among the predisposing causes of 
disease. 

In tropical and sub-tropical countries many more 
diseases are due to animal infectious agents, and animal 
parasites, than in temperate latitudes, and larger 
numbers of both agents are transmitted by insects. 
This fact again emphasizes the danger to the peoples 
of temperate climates in that either pathogenic parasites 
themselves, or their insect-hosts, may be imported dur- 
ing the period of greatest heat and moisture, find the 
conditions propitious for multiplication, and sow their 
virus promiscuously. Moreover, a few may become 



1 




J 



PHENOMENA OF INFECTION. 89 

acclimated and survive the cold of the winter months, 
breed fresh generations the following summer, and in 
this way establish a new endemic focus for the diseases 
which they carry. 

A good example of an insect which acts as host for 
an infectious animal micro-organism, and one which 
depends for existence upon the physical conditions of a 
country, is found in the species of mosquito (anopheles) 
which transmits malarial fever. As the anopheles 
only breeds in shallow puddles of water or slowly 
moving streams, it is manifest that weU-drained regions 
are likely to be free from malaria, while those presenting 
an opposite condition are favorable to its introduction. 
This same species of mosquito neither breeds nor bites 
when the temperature is below 68 Fahrenheit, a fact 
which explains the constant presence of ague in tropical 
climates. High altitudes, and moimtainous regions, 
because they do not present the physical conditions 
necessary for the multiplication of the anopheles, are 
free from malarial fever; but the same is not true for 
yellow fever, which is transmitted by another species 
of mosquito, the stegomyia fasciata. This species 
breeds in rain-spouts, cisterns, and small collections 
of water about a household. Given a favoring climate, 
therefore, where the practice of storing water about 
dwellings prevails, there is no reason why this pestif- 
erous insect cannot become domesticated in regions 
that are now outside the yellow fever zones. An 



90 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

illustration of the altitude the stegomyia may reach is 
furnished by the history of yellow fever in Mexico, as 
reported by the U. S. Public Health and Marine- 
Hospital Service. A coramission from this Service, 
called Working Party No. i, found this mosquito at an 
altitude of 4200 feet above the sea level, an ascent which 
they ascribe to a shortening of the time-distance 
between coast and interior by the building of a railroad. 
That season and disease are related phe- 

Season. nomena has already been included in our 
discussion of climate. It only remains to 
illustrate the relationship. Yellow fever is a disease 
of tropical countries, and of sub-tropical regions during 
the warm months; typhoid fever occurs everywhere 
chiefly in the autumn and early winter months. 

The effect of season upon disease is strikingly shown 
if we compare the two extremes of the year, summer and 
winter. The heated term is characterized by diseases 
affecting the intestinal tract, the cold and blustry 
months, by affections of the respiratory organs and 
joints. 

Fasting, poor food, unhygienic surround- 
Fasting, ings, etc., are potential factors in the pro- 
PoorFood, duction of infectious diseases. They all 
Etc. conduce to a low state of the vital forces; 

and an impoverished body falls an easy 
prey to the pathogenic agents. Nor are the effects 
of other agencies grouped in our chart under environ- 



PHENOMENA OF INFECTION. 91 

merit dissimilar in their action. Previous disease, 
alcoholism, injuries, and operations, all portend the 
same end, viz., a lessening of the natural resistance. 
The blood and its cells contain the largest amounts 
of those active principles which combat disease, and 
when it wastes, as it does in every disorder, this func- 
tion is depressed or suspended. Besides being 
"thinned" by disease, the blood suffers impoverishment 
through poisons (e.g., alcohol, lead); through the 
absence of either sufficient or nourishing food ; through 
unhygienic surroundings, and by actual loss in volume 
and cellular constituents in haemorrhages consequent 
upon operations and injuries, and also blood sucking 
parasites. In unhygienic surroundings perhaps the 
most potent evil is the absence of pure air (oxygen) in 
sufficient amounts to meet the normal needs of the body. 
Typhoid fever furnishes a remarkable example of the 
predisposing influence of a disease. After an attack 
of typhoid, a person is particularly prone to diseases 
of the biliary passages, such as inflammation of the 
gall-bladder (cholecystitis) and gall-stone formation 
(cholelithiasis). Predisposition is brought about in 
the following way: During the fever, typhoid bacilli 
find their way into the gall-bladder, where they are 
liable to remain for months and even years, and besides 
constituting a nidus there for the formation of gall- 
stones, may also at any time give rise to either a catar- 
rhal or suppurative inflammation of this organ. 



92 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

That occupation has a pronounced influ- 
OccuPATioN. ence upon longevity is well illustrated by 

the comparative mortality table appended. 
Comparative mortality of men twenty-five to sixty- 
five years of age, in diflferent occupations, 1881 to 1883 
(Ogle): 

Comparative 
Occupation. Mortality. 

Clergymen, priests and ministers 100 

Lawyers 152 

Medical men 202 

Gardeners 108 

Farmers 114 

Commercial clerks 179 

Innkeepers f liquor dealers 274 

/»», hotel service 396 

Brewers 245 

Butchers 211 

Bakers 172 

Tailors 189 

Book-binders 210 

Builders, masons, brick-layers 174 

Carpenters 147 

Plumbers, painters, glaziers 216 

Blacksmiths 175 

Cotton manufacture 196 

Cutler, scissor maker 229 

FUe makers 300 

Glass workers 214 

Earthen-ware workers 314 

Coal miners 160 

Stone, slate quarries 202 

Street hawkers 338 



PHENOMENA OF INFECTION. 93 

The laws of nearly all the States take cognizance of 
the dangerous character of certain occupations by 
specifying the safe-guards under which work of this 
nature is to be done, and penalizing disobedience. 
They further recognize that many occupations are not 
in themselves so injurious to health as the unhygienic 
condition of the surroundings, the crowded states of 
the work-shops, and the long hours imposed. Sweat- 
shops exhibit in the highest degree the evils just referred 
to. 

The predisposing influence of an occupation may be 
exerted locally upon some organ, as the lung, or upon 
the body generally. Thus pulmonary tuberculosis is of 
frequent occurrence in persons whose occupations are 
carried on in an atmosphere of dust peculiar to their 
trades, e.g., stone-cutters, file-grinders, cutlers, cut- 
glass grinders, etc., a danger which can be diminished 
by placing suction hoods above the field of work. 
Not all dust, however, is equally harmful, a difference 
demonstrated in the case of coal miners who, while 
breathing in a dust-laden atmosphere day after day 
for years, are not markedly predisposed to tuberculosis. 
Another example of the predisposing influence of occu- 
pation upon an organ is found in seamstresses, who, 
on account of the attitude assumed while working, 
are predisposed to ulcer of the stomach. 

Occupations which create a general predisposition 
are those in which the worker is either subjected to the 



94 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

action of poisons, or in which the tension of the work 
is a severe strain upon the nervous system. Some 
poisons per se produce pathological states, e.g., lead, 
arsenic, mercury, etc. These also tend to the produc- 
tion of an impoverished state of the blood (anaemia), 
constipation, etc., abnormalities which we already 
have called attention to as paving the way for infections. 
Occupations involving severe strains disturb the nervous 
system, which in turn affects the nutrition and func- 
tions of every part of the body. 

In Ogle's table illustrating the comparative mortality 
in the various occupations, innkeepers and liquor 
dealors are seen to head the list in point of frequency. 
This is not because there is an)d:hing especially injurious 
in the occupation, but because the occupation usually 
leads to excessive indulgence in intoxicants. So well 
recognized is this association of alcoholism with the 
handling or sale of liquors, that life insurance com- 
panies universally regard individuals of this class as 
bad "risks" and refuse to insure their lives. 

The incidence of age and disease is well 
Age. established. There are disorders of in- 
fancy, of childhood, of adolescence, and 
of old age. Middle life also has its afflictions in the 
way of special diseases, but as we are limited to in- 
fectious diseases, and they are not associated to any 
marked extent with this period, the affections peculiar 
to it will not be discussed. 



PHENOMENA OF INFECTION. 95 

The young infant is remarkable in its 
Infancy, comparative freedom from the infectious 
diseases of childhood. During late foetal 
life the imbom child may suffer from a large number 
of infectious diseases which perchance attack the 
mother, and many instances are on record of infants 
being bom with typhoid fever and small-pox; indeed 
the foetus has been known to survive an attack of small- 
pox and be bom with a scarred face, a circumstance 
which attended the birth of the great obstetrician, 
Mauriceau. To measles and scarlet fever, and even 
such a virulent infection as yellow fever, the infant up 
to the sixth month and often longer, is practically 
immune; the same is true of typhoid fever and other 
exanthemata; yet to small-pox it is highly susceptible. 
From one infection in particular should the new- 
bom be protected, namely, er3rsipelas of the umbilical 
cord, a disease, as we have seen, which has great danger 
in it for the mother also. Another infection for which 
the umbilical cord is a portal of entry is tetanus, an 
accident fortunately not often encountered. It occurs, 
however, sporadically in a few localities where the 
bacilli are numerous in the ground, and then among 
the poorest and least cleanly of the people. 

At the time of birth, if the mother is suffering from 
gonorrhoea, the infant is liable to three localizations of 
this disease, viz., in the mouth and conjunctivae of the 
eyes, and in females, in the vulva also. Gonorrhoeal 



96 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

conjunctivitis (ophthalmia neonatorum) is a very 
serious infection, and requires prompt treatment if 
the sight is to be saved. From sixty to seventy per 
cent of all blindness in the world has been caused 
by it. Happily, loss of sight may be guarded against 
by dropping one drop of a i per cent solution of ni- 
trate of silver between the parted lids of each eye, 
at birth, in all infants bom of mothers who are not 
above suspicion; indeed, nearly all maternity hospit- 
als and out-patient departments make this a routine 
procedure. 

Gonorrhoea of the vulva is also a serious affection. 
Very few vaginal discharges in children have any other 
origin. The disease is not only important because it 
may affect the child in after years, but also because it 
may cause death from peritonitis by extension of the 
infection to the peritoneal cavity. 

To the end of the second year diarrhoea in 
Childhood, summer, and respiratory infections in 

winter, are the principal diseases. From 
the second year to puberty is the period of greatest 
susceptibility to scarlet fever, measles, chicken-pox, 
mumps, whooping-cough, and diphtheria. These years 
embrace the period of childhood, and on account of 
the preponderance of the above mentioned diseases 
during this time the latter are called the "diseases of 
childhood." Diseases peculiar to children exhibit such 
variations from the same or other diseases seen in later 



PHENOMENA OF INFECTION. 97 

life as to have given rise to specialists. The specialty 
is called pcediatrics. 

Besides the general infectious diseases, children are 
more predisposed to infections of the lymphatic glands 
and bones than adults. The glands most frequently 
affected are those of the neck (cervical) ; and the infec- 
tious agents are either the tubercle bacillus, or the 
common pus cocci. Inflammation of bone, osteomy- 
elitis, is also a frequent affliction of childhood. The 
thigh and lower leg are the most likely sites for infec- 
tious foci. In this affection the tubercle bacillus, and 
the pyogenic cocci, are again the common cause. The 
unsightly deformity of hunchback (Pott's disease), 
and the lesser evil, hip-joint disease, are also examples 
of the localization of the tubercle bacillus in bone. 

Young adults still exhibit some suscepti- 
bility to the diseases of childhood, but in a 

CENCE. Ill 

much lessened degree. However, at this 
period susceptibility is principally shown towards two 
wide-spread diseases, pulmonary tuberculosis and 
typhoid fever. Predisposition to the former is almost 
entirely the result of heredity and environment; to 
the latter it appears that age is the most important 
contributing factor. 

Pneumonia is the commonest infectious 
Old Age. disease of the declining years of life, and 

the principal cause of death. In men, 
prostatic enlargement frequently interferes with the 
7 



98 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

voiding of urine, a condition which itself predisposes to 
inflammation of the bladder (cystitis). Often there 
is such obstruction that "catheter-life"* is necessarily- 
resorted to, with the result that infection sooner or 
later occurs. This per se is not immediately dangerous 
to life, although the intermittent pyrexia (fever), and 
the continuous discharge of pus, sap the patient's 
strength. Subsequently symptoms of toxaemia develop 
either through extension of the inflammation to the 
kidneys or from absorption, or from both causes. 
Death finally takes place from an intensification of 
the toxaemia, or from bacteriaemia. Pulmonary tuber- 
culosis is also encountered in old persons, and may 
also be a cause of death. Besides these affections, 
there are practically no others to which a person beyond 
sixty years is predisposed. Occasionally measles 
attacks a patriarch, and sometimes typhoid fever, but 
such instances are exceptional. 

♦The condition in which a catheter is always employed when thq 
bladder is to be emptied. 



CHAPTER IV. 
INFLAMMATION. 

The changes which take place in a tissue when 
injured, and all those changes which follow as a con- 
sequence of the injury, constitute inflammation. In 
previous chapters emphasis was laid on the fact that 
the body resents injury and is quick to battle against 
any agent which tends to do it harm; also, that it pos- 
sesses remarkable reconstructive ability when des- 
truction of tissues has occurred. Both the defensive 
and reconstructive powers of the body are due to what 
was termed its "defensive mechanism," a function 
that has grown to its present proportions through the 
operation of natural laws which govern survival and 
development. 

We have seen that recovery from infectious diseases 
is due to the neutralization of the toxic products of 
bacteria, or solution of the bacteria themselves by sub- 
stances (antibodies) which are formed within the body. 
The action of antibodies, however, is limited either to 
the neutralization of toxins or bacteria, since they 
neither repair injured tissues nor replace those destroyed. 
In simple injuries from mechanical and ph3rsical causes, 

99 



loo INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

and also in some inflicted by many chemical and 
animate ones, antibodies are not created, because the 
toxins which stimulate their production are wanting. 
In such instances the reactions excited at the site of the 
injury suflice to coimteract the action of the damaging 
agent and repair the tissues affected. But when infec- 
tious agents, and also certain poisons e. g., snake venom, 
produce injuries, then both antibodies and local defen- 
sive phenomena are brought into action. Hence the 
defensive mechanism, it will be observed, has a dual 
action; one, to produce antibodies; the other, to repair 
tissues injured and destroyed. The process of repair 
is characterized by entirely different phenomena than 
those of antibody formation, albeit both often arise 
from the same source, viz., injury to cells. This differ- 
ence is illustrated by the fact that while, on the one 
hand, the formation of antibodies is conducted by 
cells situated at a distance from the lesion, repair, on 
the other, is a process which involves the lesion itself 
and neighboring cells. For the process of repair the 
name inflammation is used, and imder it are included 
all immediate and subsequent changes in a tissue or 
organ that has sustained an injury. 

If it were our purpose to treat inflammations ex- 
haustively, we should have to take into consideration 
the various agents which produce bodily injuries, and 
every tissue and organ susceptible of injury; also such 
local and general conditions of the body as influence 



INFLAMMATION. loi 

the process in one way or another. Furthermore, 
because pathogenic agents diflFer so greatly in the 
reactions which they excite, and diflFerent tissues re- 
spond so variously to the same or different pathogenic 
agents, we would be led into a description of every 
form of inflammation, both acute and chronic — a 
study that would not end until almost the whole domain 
of pathological anatomy would have been explored. 
But such is not our purpose. There are certain fim- 
damental phenomena which characterize every inflam- 
mation which, while they represent the primary reactions 
to injury, are, at the same time, preliminary to repair. 
These we propose to explain. Besides, the evolution 
of inflammations in general presents special features 
which permit us to point out the protean* character of 
the process without committing us to a lengthy dis- 
cussion. 

Four so-called cardinal symptoms of 

Cardinal • n j.* i • j 

inflammation are commonly recognized, 
Symptoms of . , ^ j ,.. i . 

-. VIZ., heat, redness, swelling and pain. 

w*^,^xT To these a fifth is added by some authors, 

MATION. , -^ ' 

interference with function. The phenom- 
ena which underlie these symptoms are as follows: 
Redness is due. to a dilatation of the adjacent blood- 
vessels; swelling, to the increased calibre of the blood- 
vessels, and to blood-serum and blood-cells which have 
passed out from the walls of the former into the sur- 

'i' Assuming different forms. 



I02 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

rounding tissues. Pain is due to tension and pressure 
exerted on neighboring nerve-endings; heat to the 
fact that there is both an increased amount of blood 
in the part, and because metabolism is locally quickened. 
Since the nutrition of a part is obviously disturbed by 
inflammatory phenomena, there is no need to dwell 
on the associated disturbance of function. Dilatation 
of blood-vessels, exudation of serum, and migration 
of blood-cells, are therefore the body's initial response 
to injury (local reactionary phenomena), and are pres- 
ent in the beginning of inflammation. 

The earliest stage of inflanmiation, congestion, is 
not considered beyond the borderland of health, indeed 
it is the normal physiological state of a tissue or organ 
when active. When, however, serum has escaped into 
the tissues (effusion), this boundary has been passed, 
although the part may return to normal without loss 
of substance through absorption of the exudate by the 
veins and lymphatics. An exudation is protective 
to the body from infection both through its germicidal 
powers and by dilution of toxins. 

Among the early phenomena of inflam- 
Leucocytes. mation is the escape of cellular elements 

from the blood-vessels. These cells con- 
sist of both red blood-corpuscles and larger colorless 
cells, called leucocytes. There are many varieties 
of leucocytes in the blood, but probably only two or 
three of these have a share in the inflammatory process. 



INFLAMMATION. 103 

Those concerned are capable of independent move- 
ment, and make their exit from the capillaries by 
insinuating themselves between the cells which line 
the capillary walls. The fenestra which they open 
close again, but not quickly enough to prevent the escape 
of a few of the red cells. Once beyond the vessel- 
walls the movements of leucocytes are determined by a 
mysterious force exerted by the infectious agents. 
This force (chemotaxis) either attracts (positive chemo- 
taxis), or repells them (negative chemotaxis). 

Negative chemotaxis, however, is only 
Chemotaxis. active so long as the agent is present, for 

on the cessation of the agent's action, or 
its elimination, leucocytes return and take up their 
specific functions. In inflammatory conditions the 
leucocytes have several offices to perform; they carry 
off the debris of injured cells, and any foreign matter 
introduced when the injury was sustained; they also 
destroy by digestion invading bacteria; a third office 
is to take part in the formation of new tissue. In the 
last instance they are actually converted into grow- 
ing tissue cells. Metchnikoff, a distinguished bacteriol- 
ogist, who is our greatest authority on the place of 
leucocytes in inflammation, contends that they are also 
largely concerned in the production of immunizing 
substances (antibodies). Be this as it may, it is plain 
that the leucocytes are exceedingly valuable factors 
in inflammations. 



I04 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

The most important function of leucocjrtes 

Phagocy- 

in local and general inflammations is to 
destroy bacteria, an action which is desig- 
nated phagocytic, the fimction itself, phagocytosis. 

In almost every inflammatory condition 
Leucocy- 

of the body the number of leucocytes in 

TOSIS. -^ ^ 

the blood is increased. Normally, there 
are about 6000 of all kinds to the cubic centimeter, 
but 50,000 to 60,000 are not unusual in inflanmiations. 
When present in numbers above 7000, a letccocytosis 
is said to be present. The explanation of this increase 
of leucocytes in the blood is found in the large mmibers 
required at inflammatory foci. In the discharge 
from ajx abscess, for example, there are present 4 to 5 
millions per cubic centimeter. The additions made 
to the normal number of leucocytes in the blood are 
due to the stimulated activity of the blood-forming 
(hematopoietic) organs which, as occasions arise, 
verily surcharge the blood with them. Whence comes 
the stimulus ? Obviously from absorption of a prod- 
uct formed at the site of the injury. Leucocytosis 
is therefore another phenomenon which should impress 
upon us the deep-seated reactions occasioned by 
every injury, whether the latter gives rise to general 
symptoms or not, and how far parts of the defensive 
mechanism are placed from the injury. In injuries 
due to mechanical and physical agents, when not com- 
plicated by invading bacteria, the succeeding inflam- 



INFLAMMATION. 105 

mations follow an orderly progress to repair; exuda- 
tions are absorbed, dead cells and their debris are 
removed by the phagoc)^*es and connective tissue cells, 
and either connective tissue cells or cells peculiar to the 
organ or tissues involved take the place of those removed. 
But most inflammations are not of this nature, being 
caused or complicated by bacteria and their toxic 
products. The first effect of the latter is the same in 
all cases, viz., to excite the cardinal phenomena of in- 
flammation ; from this point, however, the further prog- 
ress and termination of the process is determined by 
the interaction of three forces: 

1. The nature and intensity of the invading agent. 

2. The tissue or tissues in which the bacteria are 
localized. 

3. The local and general resistance of the individual. 

Thus the same micro-organism (streptococcus pyog- 
enes) which on a mucous membrane can produce a 
false membrane, may in the subcutaneous tissues 
give rise to an abscess, or to gangrene; or if the local 
resistance is not sufl&cient, will invade the blood and 
cause a bacteriaemia. Another bacterium, the tuber- 
cle bacillus, produces usually tumor-like growths in 
tissues, but it often causes rapid necrosis, and not in- 
frequently pus. 

Here it may be well to direct attention to the fact 
that in infectious diseases the inflammatory process 
is not confined to a single locality or organ ; but since 



io6 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

either the bacteria or their toxins, or both, are dissem- 
inated throughout the body, such parts are affected as 
are susceptible to their action, and in these inflamma- 
tions are excited. 

If early subsidence of the primary phenomena of an 
inflammation does not take place, necrobiosis of greater 
or lesser degree follows : in those instances where some 
cell destruction was the starting point for the phenom- 
ena, there is extension of the necrobiotic area. Viewed 
from the stand-point of tendency, inflammations 
are either destructive or constructive, that is to say, 
some exhibit an immediate tendency to disorganization 
of tissues, other to organization. However, to say 
that the tendency of an inflammation is destructive 
does not contradict what has been said of the general 
purpose of inflammations, viz., defense and repair. 

A microbe enters a wound in the skin, 
or by way of the blood, the tissues of some 
' internal organ. Through multiplication 
and the excretion of toxins a focus of 
necrosis is established. Coincidentally with the for- 
mation of this focus the cardinal signs of inflammation 
have made their appearance, and so performed their 
part that the necrobiotic area is circumscribed by a 
wall of leucocytes which act as a barrier against deeper 
invasions. Beyond the leucoc)i:ic wall, connective 
tissue cells are in active process of proliferation pre- 
paratory to encroaching upon the necrotic area as it is 



INFLAMMATION. 107 

eliminated. Suppose the invading microbe belongs 
to a species which causes suppuration. The next 
stage in this form of inflammation would then be lique- 
faction of the dead cells by ferments, and rupture of 
the fluid contents through the skin. Gradual enlarge- 
ment of the opening often permits a "c^^re" of dead 
tissue not yet liquefied to be extruded. The material 
escaping from such a lesion is pus, and consists chiefly 
of large numbers of leucoc)^es suspended in serum and 
liquefied tissues. In this discharge are also eliminated 
bacteria and toxins. Leucocytes give pus its creamy 
consistency and yellow color. The dead tissue having 
thus been gotten rid of, healing goes on through growth 
of connective tissue cells and contraction (cicatrization). 
The above is a description of the formation and course 
of an abscess. 

Suppuration under natural conditions is practically 
alwa)rs due to bacteria — a single exception among 
animal infectious agents being the amoeba of dysen- 
tery, which is known to cause abscess of the liver. 
There are a number of bacteria which cause suppura- 
tion ; some habitually, some specifically, and others acci- 
dentally. The common members of these three groups 
are as follows: 

I. Pyogenic Bacteria. 

Staphylococcus pyogenes aureus. 
Staphylococcus pyogenes citreus. 
Staphylococcus pyogenes albus. 



io8 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

Streptococcus pyogenes. 
Micrococcus tetragenus. 
Bacillus pyocyaneus. 

2. Specific Pyogenic Bacteria. 

Diplococcus intracellularis meningitidis. 
Gonococcus. 
Bacillus of glanders. 
Bacillus of bubonic plague. 

3. Accidental Pyogenic Bacteria. 

Bacillus of anthrax. 
Bacillus of tuberculosis. 
Bacillus of influenza. 
Bacillus of typhoid fever. 

Suppuration is one example of a destructive inflam- 
mation; gangrene is another. 

When the inflammatory phenomena are not too 
intense, the connective tissue cells tend at once to 
organize about the area of injury and repair it. They 
form what are called infectious nodules. This type 
of inflammation is represented by syphilis and tuber- 
culosis, and illustrates the antithesis of suppurative 
inflammations in its immediate tendency to repair. 



CHAPTER V. 
ANIMAL PARASITES. 

Man is host for numerous animal parasites both 
large and small. A parasite, we have seen, is "an 
organism which lives upon another organism called the 
host." Parasites may live permanently upon their 
hosts, or be only temporary inhabitants. They may 
have their habitat upon the exterior of our body, when 
they are called ecto-parasites; or within it (endo-para- 
sites). All human ecto-parasites are either mites 
(arachnida), or true insects; all endo-parasites belong 
to the protozoa, trematoda, cestoda, or nematoda. 

By temporary parasite is implied an organism which 
seeks the human body for a single meal only, and passes 
for the next to a new host. To this class belongs 
mosquitoes, bed-bugs, ticks, etc. By permanent para- 
site is understood an organism which, when it finds 
lodgment upon or within the body, remains there 
until dislodged either by accident, through the instru- 
mentality of drugs, or because the host is no longer a 
suitable pabulum either for further development or 
for a continued existence. Death of the host, of course, 

terminates the status, parasitism. Most himian endo- 

109 



no INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

parasites are remarkable for the complicated and un- 
usual manner by which they attain maturity; indeed, 
it is owing to this unusual evolution that they produce 
pathological states. Nearly all require for their com- 
plete growth at least two hosts, man and some other 
creature, in each of which complementary stages of 
development take place. They may also have a stage 
of growth in water or in the ground. Taken together, 
the progressive development of a parasite from egg to 
adult is called its cycle. Parasites which require two 
hosts to complete their cycle may pass these in hosts 
which are biologically allied, as for example, the beef 
and pork tape-worms, whose hosts other than man are 
respectively implied in their names. Often, however, 
the dissimilitude in hosts is truly remarkable, and 
causes us to marvel at the ingenuity which unraveled 
their cycles. Thus, the parasites of malaria, yellow 
fever, and filariasis, have each a stage of development 
in particular mosquitoes ; the guinea-worm, in a water- 
flea; the schistoma haematobium, in a special species 
of snail. The examples given above illustrate a curious 
phenomenon in regard to parasites and hosts to which 
there are few exceptions, viz., that each parasite is 
restricted to hosts which enable it to complete its cycle, 

Note: — For a fuller description than is given here of animal para- 
sites, well illustrated, the general reader is referred to Tyson's " Prac- 
tice of Medicine," 4th ed.; or numerous articles in Woods' "Ref. 
Handbook of the Medical Sciences," last ed. 



ANIMAL PARASITES. iii 

and that development cannot take place in insects and 
animals which do not have this relationship to the 
parasites. One illustration will suffice; no other 
mosquito besides the genus stegomyia fasciata can 
harbor or convey yellow fever, and none besides the 
genus anopheles, malaria. In the stomach of other 
varieties of mosquitoes than anopheles the Plasmodia 
malaria are digested. 

PROTOZOA. 

The smallest forms of animal life parasitic upon man 
belong to the protozoa. The latter constitute that 
class of organisms the individuals of which are com- 
posed of only a single cell. Like bacteria, all parasitic 
protozoa are microscopic in size. Their structure, 
however, is far more complex, and their life-cycle is 
bizarre in the extreme. Thus, some are known to 
develop partly in water and partly in a host; others 
entirely within the bodies of two or more hosts. 

Those which have part of a cycle in water, and the 
other in man, usually gain entrance into the body in the 
drinking-water. 

Examples of this class are found in the amoeba of 
dysentery and the coccidium hominis. The last men- 
tioned is probably the cause, also, of that peculiar tumor 
known as epithelioma contagiosum. On the other 
hand, in the case of such varieties as never reach the 
external world, but spend their whole existence in 
various special hosts, these are usually conveyed to 



112 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

man by one of their hosts which itself is also a human 
parasite. An instance of the latter is found in the 
malarial plasmodium, which is inoculated by the 
anopheles mosquito. 

The principal human protozoan parasites are the 
ammha dysenteric, the trypanosoma gambiense, the pro- 
tozoan of Dum-Dum fever, and the Plasmodium ma- 
larice (three varieties). 

This parasite is the cause of an acute and 
Am(eba chronic dysentery principally 

DvsENTEHi*:. prevalent in Egypt, India, 
and tropical countries gen- 
erally, although it also occasions a large 
proportion of the cases of dysentery in 
the United States. 

The site of its activity is the large intes- coMgS^^ 
tine, the mucous membrane of which it Sraun.) 
erodes and undermines to an extent seen in no other 
malady. The organism gains entrance into the body 
in the drinking-water and through polluted vegetables 
which are eaten raw. There is a special tendency to 
abscess of the liver in dysentery of amoebic origin, and 
perforation of the abscess through the diaphragm into 
the right lung is a not uncommon event. In appear- 
ance this amceba is not unlike the white corpuscles of 
the blood. Harmless amoebae, however, also occur 
normally in the stools and must be differentiated from 
the pathogenic amxba histolytica. 






ANIMAL PARASITES. 113 

Tr3^anosomiasis, or the infestment of the 

blood with flagellated protozoa, trypano- 
Trypanosoma . . ^. 

^ somes, IS common among many varieties 

of animals, viz., fish, birds, horses, cattle, 

etc. In some it is productive of disease, 
in others not. Different varieties of tr3^anosomes, 
probably, are the cause respectively of the disease of 
horses and cattle in India and the Philippine Islands 
known as surraj and of the tsetse-fly disease or nagana 
of South Africa. In man the parasite is associated 
with the dreadful African "Sleeping-sickness," and is 
transmitted by the stinging fly glossina. 

Dum-Dum fever, or Tropical Spleno- 
DuM-DuM megaly, is a protozoan infection prevalent 
Fever. among the natives of India, Assam, Ceylon, 

China and Egypt. The parasite, Donovan- 
Leishman bodies, has been found widely distributed 
in the body. The manner of transmission is unknown. 

Protozoa which increase their numbers 
Plasmodium by the production of spores or seeds are 
Malarle. called sporozoa. When sporozoa live at 

the expense of the red blood-cells of an 
animal they are especially distinguished by the signifi- 
cant name hcemosporidia. To the latter class belongs 
the Plasmodium of malaria. The plasmodium malariae 
(Laveran), of which there are three varieties, lives and 
develops within, and at the cost of, the colored cor- 
puscles of the blood. When first seen it appears as a 

8 



Description of Fig. 5. 

Life history of malaria parasite, Plasmodium, 1, Sporozoite, intro- 
duced by mosquito into human blood, the sporozoite becomes a schizont; 
2, young schizont; 3, young schizont in a red blood -corpuscle; 4, full- 
grown schizont; 5, nuclear division; 6, spores, or merozoites, from a 
single mother-cell; 7, young macrogamete (female), from a merozoite, 
and situated in a red blood-corpuscle; 7a, young microgametoblast 
(male); 8, full-grown macrogamete; Sa, full-grown microgametoblast; 
9, mature macrogamete; 9a, mature microgametoblast; 9^, resting cell, 
bearing six flagellate microgametes (male); 10, fertilization of a macro- 
gamete by a motile microgamete; the macrogamete next becomes an 
o5kinete; 11, o5kinete, or wandering cell, which penetrates into the wall 
of the stomach of the mosquito; 12, ookinete in the outer region of the 
wall of the stomach, i. e., next to the body cavity; 13, young odcyst, 
derived from the odkinete; 14, o5cyst, containing sporoblasts, which 
develop into sporozoites; 15, older oocyst; 16, mature oocysts, con- 
taining sporozoites; 17, transverse section of salivary gland of an Anoph- 
eles mosquito, showing sporozoites of the malaria parasite in the gland 
cells surrounding the central canal. 

f i-6iillustrate schizogony (asexual production of spores); 7-16, spo- 
rogony (sexual production of spores). 

(FoLSOM— After Grassi and Leuckart, by permission of Dr. Carl 
Chun.) 



114 



ANIMAL PARASITES. 115 

small irregular colorless body within the red blood-cell. 
This body increases gradually in size until it quite 
j&lls the cell. As it grows, pigment-granules appear, 
which at first are peripherally placed, but later collect 
in a clump in the center of the parasite. At this stage 
the parasite has matured, and its whole body splits 
up into spores, or new young parasites which, upon 
rupture of the red blood-corpuscle, are set free in the 
blood and attach themselves to fresh' cells. In an 
infected person large numbers of plasmodia appear to 
reach maturity and sporulate about the same time, and 
it has been found that the chills and fever correspond 
with this division of the parasites. 

In tertian malarial fever, the plasmodium attains 
maturity in forty-eight hours, in qtcartan fever, seventy- 
two hours, facts which seem to explain the regularity 
of the chills in these two forms of ague. In cestivo- 
autumnal fever another special variety of parasite is 
concerned which attains maturity in from twenty-four 
to forty-eight hours, in consequence of which the course 
of this form of ague is irregular. 

During the course of all the malarias there are also 
formed in the blood oval, spherical, or crescentic 
bodies, some of which are flagellated, others non-flagel- 
lated. These are sexual elements of the parasites, the 
flagellated forms constituting the males, the non-flagel- 
lated, the females. Union of these in the blood, how- 
ever, for some unknown reason, does not take place, 



ii6 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

but in the stomach of different species of mosquitoes 
of the genus anopheles, which suck up the malarial 
parasites when biting. In the mosquito's stomach, 
coalescence (copulation) of the sexual elements occurs 
and a new organism is formed. The new parasite in 
turn forms other organisms in large numbers, which 
pass from the mosquito's stomach to its body-cavity 
and thence collect in its salivary glands ; from this situa- 
tion they find their way into the blood of man again when 
the insect bites. The forms thus inoculated give rise 
to malaria. 

It has been definitely proven that malarial fever can 
be conveyed in only one way, viz., through the bite of a 
mosquito which harbors the plasmodium, and that only 
species of the genus anopheles are capable of acting 
as host to this parasite. Clinically the pathological 
states resulting from invasion of the body by the pro- 
tozoan parasites above described are not unlike those 
of an infectious disease; indeed, we regard them as 
belonging to the latter class, and would therefore include 
the agents which cause them among the infectious 
agents. They are placed among the parasites here 
simply for convenience of description. 

NEMATODES. 
FiLARiA Or guinea-worm, is a round worm which 

Medinensis develops in the subcutaneous tissues. 
(Dracunculus Qnly the female is known. The worm is 
medinensis). tg^j^g^ into the stomach probably through 



ANIMAL PARASITES. 117 

drinkingwater containing small aquatic crustaceans 
{Cyclops quadricomis) which themselves harbor the 
embryos. The embryos 
penetrate the intestinal 
wall, reach the subcu- 
taneous tissues, and 
there attain full develop- 
ment. The seat of elec- 
tion is the lower ex- 
tremities, particularly 
about the heels, yet the 
parasite has been found 
in other parts of the 
body. It is said that 
the worm can be felt 
beneath the skin "like 
a bundle of strings." 
When the worm is ma- 
ture it breaks through 
the integument, forming 
at first a little vesicle, 
later a small discharg- 
ing ulcer, and from the 

I , , c ii_ 1 li ■■!_ FlO' 6. — Fitaria medintnsis; a, anterior 

bottom 01 tlie latter the eitrermty; O, mouth; P, papilte; b, fe- 
UnnJ n *: male, reduced to less ttian half normal 

head sometimes pro- ^^^i ^^. ^ 1^^^ ^^^_ (g^^, 
trudes. Embryos are "fterckus.) 
discharged through the opening in the skin, more par- 
ticularly when water is applied. After getting rid of 




ii8 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

her larvae the worm leaves her host spontaneously. The 
embryos find their way into water, often, probably, when 
the host is bathing, and as has been said, develop in the 
water-flea cyclops. The adult worm is of considerable 
size, measuring from 50 to 80 cubic centimeters (20-32 
inches) in length and a few millimeters in breadth. It 
is of a white or yellowish-brown color. When the 
worm begins to come out it should be left alone at first, 
as it may leave spontaneously. However, it can be ex- 
tracted by catching the protruding head between the 
split end of a smooth stick and winding it up on the lat- 
ter, a few turns a day. This is known as the Soudanese 
method of extraction. Care should be taken not to 
break the worm during removal, as disastrous conse- 
quences may follow rupture. 

The guinea-worm is widely distributed in tropical 
and sub-tropical countries, but occurs most frequently 
in Africa, Southern Asia, India, and Brazil. In places 
where this parasite is known all water used for drinking 
purposes should be boiled, and no uncooked vegetables 
should be eaten. Also, since the possibility of the 
worm entering the skin has not been definitely excluded, 
baths should be taken in clear water only. 

Known quite generally as the jUaria 
B sanguinis hominis lives, as its name 

implies, in the blood. Only the embryos, 
however, are really present in the blood, the adult 
worms having their habitat in one of the larger lymph 



ANIMAL PARASITES. 119 

vessels of the trunk. The mature parasites measure 
from 83 millimeters (male) to 155 millimeters (female) 
long, by 5 millimeters broad; the embryos are about 
the diameter of a red blood-corpuscle in thickness and 
about 30 times as long. This filarium is widely dis- 
tributed, being found in the Southern United States, 
South America, India, China, Japan, West Indian 
Islands, etc. 
The most important lesions resulting from the para- 






O 

Fig. 7. — ^Larval filaria hancrofti in blood. (Coplin.) 

site and its embryos are those due to obstruction of 
important lymph channels, which leads to a hyper- 
plastic condition of the tissues of the parts aflFected. 
On account of the huge enlargement of the parts, and 
their peculiar varicose appearance, the disease is called 
elephantiasis. The disease is never general, aflFecting 
only either one or both legs, the scrotum (lymph scro- 
timi), one or both labia, or a breast, etc. 



I20 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

Filarial embryos are looked for in fresh blood- 
specimens the same as for malaria. There is a peculiar 
periodicity about their appearance in the peripheral cir- 
culation in the respect that they are found only at night. 

Mosquitoes (culex) act . as intermediate hosts for 
these filaria, abstracting the embryos from one person 
and inoculating them into others. Persons suflFering 
from filariasis are therefore not only a danger to them- 
selves (on account of repeated inoculations) but to 
others who may chance to be bitten by infested mos- 
quitoes. In man again, the embryos mature, reach a 
lymph vessel and there begin producing fresh embryos. 

HcBmatochyluria is also caused by the flaria san- 
guinis hominis. However, both this and elephantiasis 
may be due to other causes. 

Besides the above filaria, two others are recognized 
by Manson, the Filaria diurna, the embryos of which 
are foimd in the peripheral circulation during the day- 
time only, and of which Manson suspects the Filaria loa 
to represent the adult worm, and the Filaria perstans, 
which the same author regards as the cause of a skin 
eruption, craw-craw, found on the west coast of Africa. 

A round worm of whitish or yellowish 
Filaria Loa. color, from 20 to 40 millimeters (i and 2 

inches) in length by 3 to 5 millimeters in 
breadth, and found in the subcutaneous tissues, usually 
of the face, but more especially in the conjunctivae. 
Its movements in the skin, which are visible to the eye, 



ANIMAL PARASITES. 121 

cause considerable itching and pain, and in the eye- 
lids inflammation and swelling. The parasite is indig- 
enous to the western coast of Africa, and is of common 
occurrence among the natives. 

Both Americans and Europeans (chiefly missionaries) 
have harbored jUaria loa after a residence in Africa, 
and had them removed on returning to their respective 
countries. Ward records the history of seven such 
cases observed by ph3rsicians in various parts of the 
United States, and has studied the specimens in a few 
of them. He concurs with Manson in the opinion that 
this filaria is a more mature form of the Filaria diurna.^ 
Removal of the parasite is accomplished by grasping 
the worm firmly through the cuticle with forceps, and 
cutting down upon it with scissors or knife. Care 
should be taken that the skinhold on the worm is not 
loosened until the worm itself is grasped, or it may 
escape into the deeper tissues. The embryos of the 
worm are believed to be inoculated into man by an 
intermediate host, either a fly or mosquito. Prophy- 
laxis in filaria loa is the same as for malaria. 

The trichocephalus dispar {whip-worm) is 
TRicmuRis a common parasite of the intestinal tract, 
TRicmuRA. particularly the caecum. Universally dis- 
tributed, it apparently does little or no 
harm, although anaemia and diarrhoea have occasionally 
been ascribed to its presence. Both the worm and its 

* See Bui. Univ. of Neb., January, 1906. 



122 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

eggs are quite characteristic and easily recognized. 
The living worm is seldom found in the stools. 
Strongy- Occurs in the stools in endemic diarrhoea 
LoiDEs of hot countries (Cochin-China). Has also 

Intestin- been described in this country by Thayer. 
ALis. Infestment only produces symptoms when 

the parasites are present in large numbers. Eggs of 
the parasites are probably ingested with drinking-water. 

Trichiniasis, as infestment of the body 
Trichinella with the trichinella spiralis is 
Spiralis called, is brought about by eat- 
(Trichina ing insufficiently cooked or raw 
spiralis). meat (usually pork) which con- 
tains the larval forms. The 
yoimg embryos which are set free in the 
stomach by digestion of their capsules, reach ^^^ g — r^i- 
maturity in the small intestines in about chiuns tHchi- 
three days. The females then give birth size' ii, male; 
to innumerable larvae — 8,000 to 10,000, it is fpysonO ^ ^ ^ 
said — which are discharged directly into the 
lymph stream, whence they finally reach the blood and 
are distributed to their points of election, the voluntary 
muscles. Here the young worms become encysted, 
i.e., each one arranges itself in a spiral, and becomes 
surrounded by an inflammatory capsule. It is to the 
encapsulation of the embryos, together with a poison 
which is possibly set free by them, that the symptoms 
of trichiniasis are due. 




ANIMAL PARASITES. 123 

The female trichinella is a fine thread-like worm 
measuring from 3 to 4 millimeters long; the male is 
smaller, measuring 1.5 millimeters, and has two little 
appendages from the hinder end (bifid). 

Practically all domestic 
animals may act as host 
for the trichinella, but in- 
festment in man is seldom 
due to any other meat be- 
sides pork. The disease 
occurs wherever pork is 
eaten. In suspected cases 
the worms should be 
sought in the stools, or 
embryos may be obtained 
by removing a small frag- 
ment of the pectoral or 
biceps muscle under local 
anxsthesla. 

If pork or other meats 
re suspected of contain- 
ing tnchinella, the latter '^^B"'"') 
may be easily demonstrated by treating a thin section of 
the tissue with a solution of caustic potash (i-io) and 
viewing it with the low-power lens of a microscope. 

Should the specimen be very fat, treat it with ether 
or dilute acetic acid first and then with the caustic 
potash solution. 




INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 



ASCAEIS 
LUMBRI- 
COTDES. 



This, the common round worm of children 

makes its home in the 

small intestines of man. 
It is the commonest 
human parasite, being universally dis- 
tributed. 

The worm, which is from 4-8 inches 
(male) to 7-1 2 inches (female) in 
length and pointed at both ends, is 
transversely striated and exhibits four 
longitudinal bands. It has a yellow- 
ish-brown or reddish color. Usually 
the host harbors only a few adults — 
but there may be many. The eggs of 
the worm, and occasionally an adult 
parasite, are passed in the stools. 

The migrations of these worms are 
remarkable, as they may crawl into 
the stomach and be vomited, or pass 
the whole length of the oesophagus 
into the nose, the middle ear, or the 
mouth. They have frequently been 
discovered in the gall-bladder, and 
have also been known to cause intes- 
tinal obstruction. Ordinarily symp- 
toms of their presence are absent, or 
are hmited to minor nervous disturb- 
ances, such as irritability, picking at 



f 




Fig. 10. — Ascarii 
lumbricoides: to left, 
male in lateral aspecl ; 
to right, female, ven- 
tral aspect, natural 
size. (Tyson after 
Raillict.) 



ANIMAL PARASITES. 125 

the nose, and nocturnal grinding of the teeth. How- 
ever, convulsions, epileptiform attacks, vertigo, and 
chorea, have also been described. The worms are 
quickly expelled by santonin (gr. J-i for child, gr. 1-2 
for adult) given either alone and followed by the same 
quantity of calomel or a saline purge; or equal quanti- 
ties of santonin and calomel may be given night and 
morning until bowels are well moved. 

The parasite is contracted from water or food con- 
taining the ova, so that a host may not only convey the 
parasites to others, but may re-infect himself. 

Also known as the pin-worm^ thread-worm^ 

OxYURis ^^^ seat-worm, has its habitat in the caecum, 

colon and rectum. It is a very common 

human parasite the world over. Foimd 

particularly in children, there is no period in life when 

they may not be contracted. 

As its name implies, it is a small thread-like worm 
from 4 millimeters (male)-io millimeters (female) in 
length, and is readily seen on examination of the 
stools. The eggs, which are also passed in the stools, 
are probably taken into the stomach with water or 
salads, or directly from the contaminated hands of the 
host. 

The symptoms occasioned by the parasite are irrita- 
bility, nocturnal restlessness, and itching, particularly 
about the anus. The worms may leave the rectum at 
night and deposit eggs on the perineum— or in females 



136 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

may invade the vagina. They have been found in the 
appendix. 

Treatment is with santonin as in infestment with 
Ascaris Lumbncoides, and the daily irrigation of the 
colon with strong salt water. These measures, how- 
ever, do not always effect expulsion, and the worms may 
be parasitic for years despite every efEort to dislodge 
them. Self-pollution may be responsible in some cases, 
at least, for the obstinacy with Vhich they resist removal. 
The Uncinaria duodenalis (strongylus 
Uncinaria duodenalis, anchylosioma dtiodenaUs, hook- 
DuODENAiis. worm), is a parasitic worm which has its 
habitat in the duodenum, the jejunum, 
and occasionally the colon. The condition to which 




Fig 13 — Tail with eipanded 
I. — Tail, with expanded bursa, bursa otmaleufictnanaAmericona. 
ia duodenalis. (Tyson.) (Tyson) 



it gives rise is known under as many names as the 
parasite, viz., anchylostomiasis, uncinariasis, hook- 
worm disease, Egyptian chlorosis, etc. 



ANIMAL PARASITES. 127 

Iiifestment is common in both the Old and the New 
World, although two distinct species of worms are con- 
cerned; the Old- World Uncinaria duodenalis, and the 
New- World Uncinaria Americana. The disease, which 
is characterized by a grave anaemia, and in untreated 
cases has a large mortality, is widely distributed in 
tropical and sub-tropical countries. There are also 
endemic foci in temperate climates. The island of 
Porto Rico seems to sufifer more from this parasite 
than any other country, one-fourth of the total deaths 
in a single year (1903) having been ascribed to it. The 
anaemia prevalent in our own Southern states has been 
demonstrated by Stiles to have the same origin. In 
temperate climates, infestment is common in tunnel- 
workers and miners. 

The adult worms, which measure from 8-10 milli- 
meters (males) to 12-18 millimeters (females), live in 
the small intestines. From a bending backwards of 
the anterior extremity the name hook-worm has been 
derived. They are blood-sucking parasites, and by 
means of teeth and a powerful sucking apparatus attach 
themselves to the mucous membrane lining the gut. 
A few parasites do not cause symptoms, but where their 
numbers are large — in many cases 1000 or more — the 
drain upon the body is considerable, often ending 
fatally. In children their presence interferes with 
development. Only the eggs of the parasite appear in 
the stools, where they are usually present in enormous 



I 



iiS INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

numbers. As they are voided in process of segmenta- 
tion, they are easily recognized by examining a drop of 
feces with the ordinary powers of the microscope. 
Hatching takes place in water or moist earth, situations 
in which the embryos may live for months. The larval 
uncinaria are taken into the body in the drinking-water, 
or from the hands which have been soiled with earth 
containing them. 

Another mode of entrance is through the skin. The 
manner in which they get Into the bowels is interesting. 
From the skin the embryos are carried to the right side 
of the heart and to the lungs. Here they escape from 
the pulmonary vessels into the air-spaces, travel up the 
bronchi and larynx into the oesophagus, and by swallow- 
ing find their way into the stomach and intestines. It 
is believed that the tropical skin affection known as 
"ground-itch," and which is usually confined to the 
ankles, is caused by the entrance of embryo uncinaria. 
In the duodenum and jejunum full development is 
attained, with subsequent reproduction of eggs. The 
cycle, it will be observed, is direct, 

The diagnosis rests upon the presence of eggs in the 
stools. Stiles calls attention to the value of the blotting- 
paper tests for blood when a microscopic examination 
cannot be made. Reference is made to this test in the 
chapter dealing with the examination of the secretions 
and excretions. 

Expulsion of the parasites is ordinarily successfully 



ANIMAL PARASITES. 129 

accomplished by giving, after a day of fasting, two 
doses of thymol (gr. 30 each) in brandy or whisky two 
hours apart, and two hours later a dose of castor oil. 
If ova are still present in the stools a few day^ later, the 
same treatment should be repeated. 

Prophylaxis consists in not going bare-footed in 
regions where the disease prevails, in boiling the drink- 
ing-water, and in scrupulous cleansing of the hands 
before meals. The stools of persons harboring the 
parasites should be disinfected, and treatment instituted 
in all cases where eggs are found whether symptoms 
of the disease are present or not. 

FLAT WORMS. 

Parasitic flat worms are divided into two orders, 
the trematodes or flukes, and the cestodes or tape- 
worms. The former are distinguished by possessing a 
partial digestive canal but no anus; the latter by a 
complete absence of alimentary tract. 

TREMATODES. 

Distomiasis is the name applied to diseases resulting 
from trematodes or flukes. Flukes are mostly small, 
flat, leaf-shaped worms, which, as above noted, are 
without anal orifices. Usually they possess one or 
more suckers and occasionally booklets. They are 
mostly hermaphroditic. Only the more important 
varieties will be referred to. 



INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

This, the Asiatic lung fluke, is of frequent 
n^*t^°™^^ occurrence in human beings in China, 
Japan, Korea and Formosa, causing the 
disease known as pulmonary distoraiasis 
or parasitic hjemoptysis. In the United 




ANIMAL PARASITES. 131 

length by 4-6 millimeters in breadth, and almost as 
thick as broad. It is of a pinkish or reddish-brown 
color. Usually the worm inhabits the bronchial tubes 
of the animal upon which it is parasitic, but it has been 
found in other situations also. 

The symptoms to which it gives rise are rarely serious, 
consisting of a chronic cough, and a rusty (sanguineous) 
expectoration. Occasionally there is severe haemopty- 
sis. Ova of the parasites are found in the expectora- 
tion, and from these the diagnosis is made. Nothing 
is known of the manner of infestment. Stiles sounds a 
note of warning by pointing to their presence in domes- 
tic animals. 

LIVER FLUKES. 

A number of liver flukes occasionally parasitic in 
man have been described, of which one, and possibly 
two, are of considerable importance. 

Foremost is the Chinese or Japanese liver 

pisTHOR- Q^^Q Opisthorchis sinensis, which is com- 

Sinensis ^^^ ^^ China, Japan, and India. This 

species is somewhat larger than the lung 
fluke, being from 10-20 millimeters in length by 2-5 
millimeters in breadth. As its name implies, it has its 
seat of election in the liver, particularly the gall-pas- 
sages, and gives rise to digestive disturbances, jaundice, 
anaemia and dropsy. Years elapse between the time 
of infestment and death. The diagnosis rests on the 
presence of eggs in the stools. 



132 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

Beyond the fact that the eggs will develop to a certain 
stage in water, nothing is known of the life-history of 
this parasite. 

Another liver fluke, common in sheep ; it is 
Fasciciola also found in cattle, hogs, horses, and 
Hepatica. ruminants in general. They produce in 

sheep the so-called ' ' liver-rot. ' ' The worm 
is a frequent parasite of animals in the United States. 
Few cases, however, have been described in human 
beings an)rwhere. The symptoms of infestment are 
the same as in the other liver-fluke diseases already 
described. The eggs of the parasite are found in the 
stools. They are taken into the body probably in 
water or upon raw salads. 

This fluke is distinguished from other 
ScmsToso- flukes already described by the fact that it 
MTO H^MA- jg ^^^^^ j^ ^^^ y^^j^ particularly the por- 

(Bilharzio *^^ ^^^^ ^^^ ^^^ branches. The disease 
haematobia). which it causes, haemic distomiasis, Bilhar- 

ziosis, or Egyptian haematuria, is prevalent 
in Egypt, Africa, Persia, and the west coast of India. 
It is said to occur in Cuba and Porto Rico also. Im- 
ported cases are occasionally encountered everywhere. 

In this fluke the sexes are separate. The eggs of 
the parasite are the chief cause of mischief. 

Symptoms of the disease are practically always 
referable either to the bladder or rectum. In involve- 
ment of the former viscus there is pain and burning over 



ANIMAL PARASITES. 133 

the supra-pubic region, irritability of the bladder, and 
haematuria; in the latter, straining, tenesmus, and the 
passage of blood and mucus. Ova are found in either 
discharge, and the diagnosis rests upon their discovery. 
Haemic distomiasis is a very important disease, as its 
prevalence in many countries attests. Since communi- 
cation with the East has become closer, a larger number 
of imported cases have been reported. Dr. Stiles is 
of the opinion that the United States will sufifer from 
importation of parasites by troops returning from foreign 
service and by travelers. The same author leans to 
the belief that a snail acts as intermediate host for the 
haematobium. If this be true, before the disease can 
become endemic in the United States depends upon 
'^ whether there exist in the United States species of 
snails which can serve as intermediate hosts, and 
whether these snails actually become infected by persons 
harboring the parasite." Furthermore, if snails act 
as intermediate hosts, then "cases of infection are 
more likely to occur in rural districts than in cities, 
and country physicians will be more likely to encounter 

them^^ (Stiles). 

CESTODES. 

Cestodes or tape-worms are flat, segmented, ribbon- 
like worms which have their habitat in the smaU mtes- 
tines. They are characterized by a complete absence 
of a mouth or digestive tract, and nourishment is 
maintained entirely by absorption of nutrient material 



134 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

through the external covering. Depending upon the 
species, the length of the wonn varies from a few inches 
(dwarf tape-worm) to thirty or more feet (Bothriocepha- 
tus latus). The adult worm consists of a head or 
scolex, a thin thread-hke neck, and a body made up 
of conjoined segments or proglottides. The head is 
provided with suckers, in some species with booklets 
also, by means of which the worm fastens itself to the 
gut and maintains its position. It is on account of these 
organs of attachment that the head is often difficult 
to dislodge. Yet it must be expelled if a cure is to be 
effected, since growth of the worm proceeds entirely 
from the head end. The neck is unsegmented. Behind 
the neck, the first segments are short and narrow, but 
they gradually increase in size until the adult dimensions 
are attained. The size of a segment is related to its 
maturity. 

In each proglottidls are found both sexual elements 
in various stages of development. The more mature 
segments are situated towards the distal end of the 
worm and contain numerous ova, in each of which is an 
embryo worm. Segments containing embryos are said 
to be "ripe," and it is these which are constantly sep- 
arating from the less mature and being shed in the 
I stools. When they appear in the stools, two or more 
segments are usually found attached together. These 
may have the power of independent locomotion, a 



ANIMAL PARASITES. 135 

that they constitute a whole worm. When eggs con- 
taining embryos are taken into the stomach of a suitable 
host — ^usually in water or food — the embryos are liber- 
ated, pass into the small intestines, the walls of which 
they penetrate, and reach various tissues and organs, 
the liver, muscle, brain, etc. Here they become encysted 
and develop into cysticerci or "bladder-worms," that 
is to say, they are converted after a few months into a 
C3rst full of fluid. From a point on the inner wall of 
each cyst a little bud projects, which in time is converted 
into a tape-worm head or scolex, and a sac containing 
it. A cyst containing a tape-worm head is known as a 
^^ measles ^^ or cysticercus cellulosce. Flesh of this kind 
is said to be measled. As C)rsticerci the parasites live 
indefinitely until the flesh containing them is eaten by 
another host, in the intestinal tract of which they then 
grow into mature tape-worms. The cycle of the cestodes 
is therefore in two hosts, with possibly a short interval 
between spent in water. Tape- worms parasitic in man 
belong to two orders — ^the Tcmiadce and the Bothrio- 
cephalidcB. The first occurs in man either as " measles " 
or as tape-worms, the latter only as tape-worms. Ten 
species of tape-worms have been described, of which 
three, only, are known definitely to be connected with 
food. These are Tcmia saginata (T. mediocanellata) 
due to measly beef, Tcmia solium, to measly pork, and 
Bothriocephalus latus, to infested fish, such as sturgeon, 
pike, perch, and salmon. 



1^6 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

The unarmed or beef tape-worm is the com- 

T«NU SAGI- ^ r ,. f 1 ■ A 

,„ monest of tape-worms found in Amenca. 

NATA (T. me- ^ 

diocanellata) -^* inhabits the small intestines. In length 
it varies between 9 and 24 feet. The head, 
which measures about 2 millimeters 
in breadth, is pyriform and with- 
out booklets, but contains four 
cup-shaped suckers on its ventral 
aspect. The ripe segments are 
from 17-18 millimeters in length 
by 8-10 millimeters in breadth- 
Cattle act as intermediate hosts, 
and eating uncooked beef contain- 
ing the cysticerci gives rise to in- 
festment in man. 

Both eggs and proglottides are 
passed in the stools. The proglot- 
tides are easily recognized and are 
diagnostic of an adult worm. 
S)Tnptoms due to tape-worms may 
be absent entirely, or may consist 
Fig. 14.— renin medi- of occasional colic and an abnormal 

xanellaia. (Gould, after .. 

Leuckan.) appetite. 

Or pork tape-worm is a rare parasite in 

Ta;NiA the United States. In Europe it is not 

Solium, uncommon. It is a smaller cestode than 

tania sagmata; the head measures less than 

the head of a pin (0.6-1 millimeter) ; the ripe proglottides 




ANIMAL PARASITES. 137 

are 10-12 millimeters long by 5-6 millimeters broad; 
and the length of the whole worm varies between 6 
and 9 feet. The head is provided with four suckers, 
and a double row of booklets, a fact from which has 
arisen the name "armed tape-worm." 
The ingestion of insufficiently cooked 
"measled" pork is responsible for 
infestment. 

Usually only a single worm is fomid 
in one individual, but more may occur. 
Tcenia solium is a much more danger- 
ous parasite than tania saginata be- 
cause man may be the host for both 
the adult and bladder-worms ; on this 
account a person that harbors this 
parasite should be especially careful 
not to carry a soiled hand to the mouth 
or allow it to contaminate food. 

The adult worm per se gives rise to 
few or no symptoms, but if its eggs 
are ingested, the embryos, besides be- 
ing distributed to muscles, may also ^ 

. , , , . . ■" Fig. i^.—Dibethrio- 

nnd lodgment in important organs, ctphaius latus. (Tyson, 
e.g., the brain, eye, liver, etc. after Leuckart.) 

DiBormiio- '^^^' ^^^ longest tape-worm met in man, 
cEPHALus '^ commonest along the Baltic Sea, in 
Latus (Both- Japan, and in Switzerland. It is also said 
riocephalus to be of frequent occurrence in Munich, 
latus). The parasite measures from 6 to 30 feet 




138 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

or more in length. The head is narrow transversely 
(0.71 millimeters) and differs from the /(Ewta in having 
two lateral grooves or bothridia as suckers. There 
are no hooklets. 

Fish act as intermediate hosts for the measles, stur- 
geon, pike, perch, etc. In the stools of a person harbor- 
ing the bothriocephalus, eggs characteristic of the worm 
are found in lai^e numbers. These find their way 
into water, when the embryos escape 
from the eggs and lead a free existence for 
an unknown period. They are finally 
swallowed by their fish-hosts, from whom 
man in turn acquires the adult worm. 

This is a dog tape-worm 
DiPYLmnjM which is widely distributed. 
Caninum Its intermediate hosts are the 
(tffinia cu- d(^-louse and flea, and the 
cumerina). ordinary flea of man {pulex ,i^°„'^a~£(fX 

irritans). Its chief interest {}f?-^}^' =^'*^'' 

Wetnlaod.) 

in human pathology is that children occa- 
sionally harbor the adult worm, contracting it from 
the dog's louse or flea. 

Known also as the "dwarf- tape- worm," 
Hyueno- is a short cestode parasitic in rats, 
LEPsis Nana, mice, and man. The intermediate host 

is not known. The worm is known 
throughout Europe, and lately many cases have been 
reported from the Southern United States (Stiles). 



ANIMAL PARASITES. 139 

Is found principally among the very poor. When many 
worms are present they may give rise to severe S)niip- 
toms, and may even be a cause of death. The adult 
worm only measures from 10 to 15 millimeters in length. 
The head is provided with four suckers, and also with 
a single row of booklets. 

VISCERAL CESTODES. 

Whereas adult cestodes which inhabit the alimentary 
tract occasion as a rule unimportant symptoms, local- 
ization in various organs of the "measles" or bladder- 
worms may be a very serious event. Fortunately 
man may act as host for thejarval forms of only two 
tape- worms, viz., '2%wia soliut^ and TcBnia echinococ- 
cus; and more fortunate still, such infestment is not 
common. 

Or "measles," it will be remembered, is 
the embryo stage of Tcmia solium or pork 

^ tape-worm. Man usually harbors the adult 

Cellulosa. ^ . , ^ , "^. . - . 

parasite, but from the mgestion of ripe 

eggs he may also become the host of the 
larvae. The s)niiptoms of infestment depend on the 
localization of the cysticerci. Unless a vital organ is 
involved they may be trivial; but in the brain, cord, or 
eye, serious mischief results. In a few cases the pres- 
ence of subcutaneous nodules excited suspicion, which 
was confirmed by removing one and examining with the 
microscope. 



I40 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 



The adult form of this cestode is found in 
TAENIA Ecm- the dog, wolf, jackals, etc. Man harbors 
Nococcus. the larvae. Infestment is practically only 

encountered where dogs are kept in close 
relationship with their masters, as in Iceland and 
Australia. In other countries sporadic cases are 

occasionally reported, usu- 
ally in foreigners, who prob- 
ably contracted the disease 
elsewhere. The adult worm 
/f ps jfffiHBPL is a tiny cestode from 2.5-5 
V? Kl ^S^V miUimeters in length, with 
V 1^1 ^Bffll^^ a head provided with four 

cup-shaped suckers and a 
double row of booklets. 
When man ingests the ripe 
ova of this worm, visceral 
infestment (Echinococcus 
disease) ensues. Localiza- 
tion may be in any organ, 
^f\ 'iT^f?^ echinococcus: j^e liver, lungs, kidney, 

a, adult; o, head from ecninococcus ' *^ ' ^ •' ' 

cyst. On left a detached hooklet, etC. Huge CyStS enclosing 

as seen in fluid from cyst. (Coplin , 

and Sevan, after Leuckart.) nUmerOUS Other CystS axe 

stages in the development of 
the embryos, countless numbers of which may develop 
from a single egg, thus differing from the cysticercus of 
other cestodes in that a single egg gives rise to only 
one embryo. 




ANIMAL PARASITES. 141 

INSECTS- 

Parasitic diptera, or two-winged flies, 
Parasitic occupy an important position in relation 
Diptera. to disease, since various species of this 

order are harmful to man in a number of 
ways. Besides the inconvenience that large numbers 
of diptera cause by their bites (e.g., jigger-flea, bed- 
bug, etc.), incidents which are not always unattended 
with danger to health and life, others of this order may 
burden the economy with their young. The latter is 
accomplished in one of two ways: i. By depositing 
their eggs or larv« either upon wounds or in cavities 
(of the body) leading to the exterior, such as the nose, 
ears, vagina, etc., or by placing them beneath the skin. 
In all such instances the larvae feed in the places depos- 
ited and cause such annoyance as their growth and 
migrations excite. 

2. In other instances the eggs or larvae are taken 
into the intestinal tract with food or drink, and are 
voided in the feces. 

Myiasis is the technical term used to denote the con- 
dition in man in which the larvae of diptera are 
parasitic; and depending upon whether the larvae 
(maggots) are upon the exterior or interior of the body 
it is designated external or cutaneous, and internal 
myiasis, respectively. Where maggots are found in the 
stools care must be taken to exclude the possibility of 
flies having had access to the stools, since living young 



142 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

may be deposited upon them by the latter. Mosquitoes 
belong to the two-winged flies or diptera, a fact which, 
if previously unknown to the reader, will now suggest a 
third way in which these insects are harmful, viz., 
by acting as secondary hosts for other human parasites. 
Because the relationship of mosquitoes to malaria, 
yellow fever and filariasis, has already been sufficiently 
elucidated, additional reference to them here would be 
superfluous. 

Finally, diptera may accidentally convey disease- 
agents either upon their bodies or in their feces, factors 
in disease that have also already been considered else- 
where. 

To the (Estridae or bot-flies belong those species 
the larvse of which are parasitic upon man. 

Dermatobia noxialis Goudot. This fly 

(EsTRus is a common pest in tropical America. 

HoMiNis. Known under numerous names, viz., Ver 

macaque (Cayenne and Mexico), Ura 
(Brazil), Torcel (Costa Rica), its larvae are deposited 
upon exposed portions of the body, whence they work 
their way into the subcutaneous tissues. Here, if 
undisturbed, they complete their growth and issue when 
mature from the abscesses to which their presence gives 
rise. The larvae are quite characteristic in that one 
end (head) is quite large in comparison with the other, 
and there are minute spines on segments two and 
three. 



ANIMAL PARASITES. 143 

The larvae of this fly are also common 
Dermatobia ites. They are distinguished from 

CyANTVEN- jo 

TRis ^'^ larvae of noxialis by having no fine 

spines on segments two and three, but a 
row of strong hooks projecting from the hind margin of 
segments four to seven (Blanchard). 

Compsomyia macellaria is known through- 
CoMPsoMYiA out America, but cases of myiasis due to its 
Macellaria. larvae are only common in the warmer por- 
tions. The larva is known as the "screw 
worm." The bot-fly itself has a reddish-brown head, 
a bluish-green thorax and abdomen, and the thorax 
is further distinguished by three longitudinal black 
stripes. The eggs are deposited upon the skin, where 
they quickly hatch, and the larvae then work their way 
into the subcutaneous tissues and produce abscesses. 
But here and there eggs are laid in the nostrils of individ- 
uals asleep. In this situation the growing worms pro- 
duce a terrible state of affairs, since in their burrowings 
they may destroy all the tissues of the soft palate and 
posterior pharynx, and may even lay bare the hyoid 
bone. As many as three hundred maggots have been 
discharged from the mouth and nose of a single indi- 
vidual. 

This, the common blue-bottle or flesh-fly, 
Sarcophaga occasionally lays its grubs in old ulcers, 
Carnaria. which then have the appearance of "liv- 
ing," that is to say, the maggots are as 



144 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

actively motile as when ordinarily seen in decomposing 
material. Solutions of bichloride of mercury (i-iocx)) 
quickly rid the host of these parasites. 

Or common flea is a minute red or dark- 
PuLEx brown insect which is only parasitic upon 

Irritans. man in countries where it is present in 

great numbers. It is particularly trouble- 
some in hot countries. Its eggs are not laid 
in the skin, but in cracks of floors, sawdust 
and dust. Its bites are irritating and may 
cause wheals (hives). 

The sand-flea, "jigger," "jig- 
Sarcopsylla ger-flea," "chigoe" or "chique" 
(pulex) is a more serious parasite than 

Penetrans, the common flea. The impreg- 
nated female burrows into the skin to breed ^ ^^- l^- — 

Larva of pu^ 

her young, which are very numerous. Favor- lex irritans, 
ite situations are the lower extremities and 
feet, particularly beneath the nails of the toes. Painful 
swellings, abscesses, and ulcers often result. The in- 
sect is principally found in Central and South America, 
and South Africa. The fleas may be picked out with 
a needle, but one should be careful to extract them 
whole since distressing sores may otherwise result. 

Bed-bugs are true cosmopolitans, being 
CiMEx found the world over. The body is thin 

Lectularius. and flat and oval in outline. Its color 

varies from a grey to a dark reddish-brown. 




ANIMAL PARASITES. 145 

It has a characteristic odor. It is entirely nocturnal in its 
habits, sucking blood at night and hiding in the cracks 
of the bed, of cupboards, etc., in the daytime. This 
pest can usually be eradicated from beds, etc., by 
washing with bichloride of mercury (1-500), pure 
carbolic acid, or kerosene. 

Where the room or building is so badly infested that 
these measures do not suffice, fumigation with sulphur 




2, back view. 

(i pound to each 1000 cubic feet of space) is a reliable 
measure. No moisture is required as in the case of 
fumigation against bacteria, so that fabrics are not 
necessarily injured, and the exposure need not be longer 
than two or three hours. 

Pediculi or lice are found chiefly in two 
Pedicdli. situations on the body, in the hair of the 
head (pediculi capitis), and in the pubic 
hairs (pediculi pubis or inguinalis). 



146 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

Another louse is found in the seams of the clothing 
(pediculus vestimenti). 

This is usually found in uncleanly persons, 
Pediculus but may accidentally invade the fastidious. 
Capitis. A peculiarity of this louse is that its color 

varies with its hosts, that is to say, it is 




Fig. 21. — Ovum 
of head-louse glued 
tohair;X 70. (Ty- 
son, after firaun.) 




Fig. 22. — Pediculus capitis, X 15* 
(Tyson, after Braun.) 



light grey on a Caucasian, yellowish or dark-grey on the 
Mongolian, and black on the Negro. The individual 
lice are difl&cult to find, but their presence is assumed 
by finding eggs or "nits." These are little oval glisten- 
ing bodies attached to the hairs. Treatment consists 
in cutting the hair and washing with kerosene. 



ANIMAL PARASITES. 



147 



This louse is commonly known as the 
Pediculus "crab-louse," from its resemblance to a 
Pubis. crab. Its nits are attached to the hairs 

quite close to the skin. Oftenest the nits 
are only found in the pubic or adjacent hairy parts, 
but they may be present on the hairs of the chest, the 
axillae and even on the eye-brows. 
Where the insect bites, a minute 
slate-colored lesion results which 
itches intensely. 

The parasite is ordinarily con- 
veyed from person to person 
during sexual congress, but sleep- 
ing with a person harboring the 
parasite may be the means of 
contracting it. 

The "toilet" has also been 

held responsible. fi^. 2^,^Pedicidus vesti- 

Both the parasite and its nits ^*-;X io» circa. (Tyson, 

* after Braun.) 

are quickly killed by smearing 

the afiFected parts with mercurial (blue) ointment. 

The clothes-louse makes its home in the 
Pediculus seams of the clothing and underwear. Its 
Vestimenti. bites cause itching. Scratch-marks over 

the back and around the waist-line usually 
evidence its presence. Boiling or steaming the cloth- 
ing, or hot ironing, are easy means of ridding a person 
of the parasite. 




148 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

Or Sarcoptes hominis, the itch-mite, is 
AcARus another parasitic insect which forms bur- 
ScABiEi rows in the skin. Only the female pro- 
(itch-mite). duces lesions, the purpose being the depo- 
sition of her eggs. The portions of the 
body selected are those where the skin is thinnest, viz., 
in the webs between the fingers, at the bend of the elbows, 
in the axilla, upon the penis, at the bend of the knees, 
and about the ankles. In children, burrows may be 
found over the whole body. 

Where the mite penetrates the skin a little vesicle is 
formed, and the direction of the burrow is indicated 
by a rough, dark line. However, because intense 
itching always accompanies the insect's activity, the 
only lesions discoverable may be scratch-marks. Itch- 
ing is most complained of at night, the period when the 
female is active. The itch-mite is so small that it is 
seldom seen and the diagnosis of its presence is made 
entirely from the character and situation of the lesions. 
It is of historical interest that the first Napoleon was a 
sufferer from "itch" for ten or twelve years until cured 
by the physician Couvisart. 

The parasite is contracted by intimate contact with 
a person who harbors it. 

Eradication of the mite is easily accomplished by 
scrubbing the lesions with soap and a soft brush, 
followed by rubbing Balsam Peru well into the bur- 



ANIMAL PARASITES. 149 

rows. Sulphur ointment, although highly recommended, 
is not nearly so efficacious. 

The harvest-mite, which is active during 
Leptus July and August, is a red-colored larvte 

AoroMNALis. of a variety of Trombtbidm. The latter ' 

lives on grasses, bushes, and grain, and its 
larvae alight on man as occasion offers. The red 
papules and wheals which it produces are usually 





Fig. 35. — Female ot 
Ixodes rieimu, gorged 
full, ventral and dorsal 
surfaces, f. (After Pa- 
genstecher.) 



situated on the ankles, but may also be found on other 
parts of the body. 

The wood-jack or wood-tick is a fairly 

Ixodes large yellowish-brown tick, with a black 

Ricmus. head and a leathery body. It is common 

upon grasses and bushes, and from these 

places gets upon man and beasts. It is a blood-suck- 



ISO INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

ing parasite, burying its head and sometimes almost its 
whole body in the integument. 

In various localities, e.g., Africa, and Montana, U. S., 
fevers are described which are believed to be due to 
the bites of ticks (tick-fever, Ixodiasis); the evidence 
in favor of such relationship, however, is contradictory. 



CHAPTER VI. 

AVENUES OF EXIT OF INFECTIOUS AGENTS 
AND PARASITES FROM THE BODY. 

The source of every infectious disease is always 
another infectious disease, that is to say, the infectious 
agent has come directly or indirectly from some other 
person. The spontaneous generation of disease is no 
longer believed in, no more than is the spontaneous 
generation of life from lifeless matter. It is true that 
we cannot always trace the connection between suc- 
cessive cases of the same disease, but such instances 
are few in comparison with the number in which the 
relationship can be proven. However, what has defi- 
nitely been determined is the manner of exit from the 
body of micro-organisms in practically all of the infec- 
tious diseases of both known and unknown origin. 
This, from a sanitary standpoint, is of surpassing 
importance, because it permits of our destroying the 
infectious agents at their source and when concentrated, 
and thus give them no opportunity to be scattered, so 
to speak, to the four winds. 

It is self-evident that the communicability of a 
disease bears a definite relationship to the nimiber of 

151 



IS2 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

exits open to the causative agents, and that one disease 
may, therefore, require greater precautions than another 
to prevent its spread. In no field of public utility does 
knowledge confer greater power than in sanitary 
science, and in this matter of the exit of micro-organ- 
isms from the body in disease we have the key to the 
happiness of families, the prosperity of nations, and to 
victory in wars. Moreover, it robs disease of its terrors 
by suggesting protective measures which can be relied 
upon to be entirely eflicient. If all of the infectious 
agents were efficiently dealt with upon their exit from 
the body, the various diseases to which they give rise 
would in time become traditions; but until Arcadia is 
attained this will not be done. 

Sanitarians in order to work in an enlightened manner 
must inform themselves of both the direct and indirect 
sources of disease. A direct source is a diseased person, 
so that this study begins with the elimination of infec- 
tious agents from the body. 

In general if may be stated that microbes leave the 
body in six ways: 

1. In the expectoration and nasal secretion. 

2. In the stools. 

3. In suppurations discharging externally. 

4. From the skin. 

5. In the urine. 

6. From the blood through the bites of suctorial 
(biting) insects. 



AVENUES OF EXIT OF INFECTIOUS AGENTS. 153 

Perhaps for completeness we should add that they 
also make their exit in the lachrymal and vaginal secre- 
tions ; but since there is no specific infection of the uterus, 
and only a few of the conjunctiva, these exits are not of 
sufiicient importance to justify an individual place in 
our division of the avenues of exit. Furthermore, the 
inflammatory conditions found in both these situations 
might, with perfect propriety, be included under divis- 
ion three. 

The exit of a micro-organism from the body depends 
upon the character and location of the disease, namely, 
whether it be local or general. If a disease is localized 
in such a portion of the body as communicates with the 
exterior, the germs make their exit by that channel. 
Thus, in inflammatory conditions of the lungs, the 
offending microbes are discharged by way of the 
passages that lead from them to the exterior. Similarly, 
in infections of the uterus the infecting agents make 
their exit by way of the vagina. But if, on the other 
hand, the disease be general, that is, if the germs are 
circulating in the blood, there may be various avenues 
of exit, the urine, the skin, the sputum, the stools, and 
sometimes, through the bites of insects. 

Until quite recently, many diseases that we now know 
to be general were looked upon as localized infections, 
and therefore their agents were supposed to leave the 
body by a single channel; but later researches have so 
modified our views that we now believe there are very 



f 



IS4 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

few infections in which the agents do not pass to the 
exterior in a variety of ways. In those diseases which 
are both local and general we find the roost numerous 
avenues of exit, and in them it is possible for the infec- 
tious agent to leave the body in every one of the six 
ways enumerated above. An example of a common 
disease in which the germs make their exit in at least 
five ways, with a possibility of six, is furnished by 
typhoid fever; in its incipiency the bacilli are localized 
in the lower portion of the small, and the beginning of 
the large intestines — but they soon invade the blood, 
and by the latter are so distributed that they may be 
eliminated in any of the secretions, in localized sup- 
purations, and even by the bites of insects. 

It often happens in the course of a disease that a 
micro-organism will make its exit in some other way than 
the channels ordinarily followed. This occurs princi- 
pally when complications arise. Therefore, whenever, 
in the course of an infectious disease, complications arise 
in which there is a pundent or other discharge to the 
exterior, these discharges should be regarded as fresh 
avenues of exit for the specific micro-organisms. 

To be sure, complications are often due to microbes of 
a species different from the one causing the primary 
infection; but in the absence of definite information to 
the contrary, it is a safe rule to regard complications 
as due to a migration to another part of the body of 
the first invader. Thus, when an otitis media (midd) 



AVENUES OF EXIT OF INFECTIOUS AGENTS, iss 

eax disease) complicates diphtheria, or follows as a 
sequela, the discharge from the ear is quite likely to 
contain diphtheria bacilli; and in the same way the 
purulent pleurisy (empyema) which often complicates 
pneumonia, is usually an extension to the pleura of the 
same micro-organism which caused the pneumonia. 
Failure to give due regard to such considerations may 
lead in certain of the infectious diseases to serious con- 
sequences. Cases in point are otitis media following 
diphtheria and scarlet fever, the discharges from the 
throat and ear in either case remaining infectious for 
weeks after recovery. The virus of scarlet fever is 
especially tenacious in that way, and the records of the 
disease are full of instances in which it has been con- 
veyed by children with discharging ears after release 
from quarantine. 

The sputum is a prolific source of infection, 

EXPECTOR- . I • .1 A. I.' J. 

smce always m the expectoration, to a 

ATION. -^ . ^ . ' 

lesser extent m the nasal secretions, are 
discharged the microbes that give rise to inflammatory 
conditions of the air-passages : the lungs, the bronchi and 
trachia, the pharynx, the buccal and nasal cavities. 
The inflammations in question may be primary in the 
part affected, or secondary to an inflammatory process 
elsewhere; or they may be part of a general disease. 
An example of these various conditions is found in 
pneumonia. Pneumonia may occur as an independent 
infection; it may be secondary to an inflammatory 



iS6 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

process elsewhere, e.g., abscess of liver; or it may be 
part of a general infection, such as t)^hoid fever. 

In either the sputum or nasal secretions, or both, there- j 

fore, are always found the infectious agents of diphtheria, j 

influenza, scarlet fever, whooping-cough, mumps, rabies 
(hydrophobia), pneumonia, tonsillitis, bronchitis, pulmo- 
nary tuberculosis (consumption), tubercular laryngitis, 
cerebro-spinal fever (secretion from nose ?) , measles, acute I 

glanders (farcy) , actinomycosis, small-pox, leprosy (when 
lesions are in nose), aphthous fever (foot and mouth dis- 
ease,) echinococcus disease of the lungs, s)^hilis (primarily 
in mouth), and t)^hus fever. Parasites — eggs of Para- 
gonimus (Distoma) Westermaniiy in parasitic haemoptysis. 

In the same secretions, but only when the respiratory 
passages are also involved in the disease, are foimd the 
microbes of t)^hoid fever, anthrax, bubonic plague, 
actinomycosis, amoebic dysentery (in perforation of 
abscess of liver into lung), syphilis (secondary), tuber- 
culosis, leprosy, glandular fever ( ?), gonorrhceal stomat- 
itis (child infected during parturition). In the vom- 
itus, it is always to be remembered, such organisms as 
cause intestinal diseases, or intestinal parasites and their 
eggs, may be ejected. Thus cholera spirilla have been 
found in vomited matter, as well as the eggs and even 
segments of tape-worm. 

As an avenue of exit for micro-organisms 

Feces. the stools rank with the sputum in impor- 
tance, if they do not surpass it. Besides 



AVENUES OF EXIT OF INFECTIOUS AGENTS. 157 

the fact that there are as many infectious processes 
localized in the intestinal tract as in the air-passages, in 
all of which the microbes are eliminated in the stools, 
the germs of every general disease find their way into 
the same passage by way of the bile. Furthermore, 
a host of animal parasites are found sporadically in the 
intestinal tract from which they or their eggs escape 
by the natural passages. With one exception, i.e., in 
consumption, the sputum is chiefly dangerous to those 
immediately surrounding the patient; and even in this 
disease the infection is mostly limited to dwellings, 
factories, and oflices. The feces, on the contrary, are 
the source of certain wide-spread infections at great 
distances from the patient. This happens because the 
micro-organisms causing these diseases are capable of 
growth outside the body, particularly in water, and 
because they are such as must be taken into the alimen- 
tary canal to produce their effects. 

In the matter of disposal of sewage we are still bar- 
barians, if not criminals ; and the diffidence with which 
the public views the pollution of its water-supply by 
alvine discharges is a shame to our much vaunted 
civilization. In fact, it is little short of miraculous that 
a stop has not been put to it long ago, when one con- 
siders the wide publicity given to the actual and possible 
dangers of such a filthy and obnoxious practice. But 
it is permitted to go on, with the result that there is 
scarcely a city or town that does not drink water which 



r 



f 



INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

is polluted by the sewage of another city ; and the former 
places in turn pour their disease-carrying waste into 
other rivers and lakes which supply the drinking-water to 
still other communities. Thus is a "vicious circle" of 
infection maintained. Is it surprising then that in this 
way many diseases are spread, such as typhoid fever, 
cholera and dysentery, and that the parasites of numer- 
ous intestinal disorders are distributed to new hosts ? 

But because the general public regards with indiffer- 
ence the infliction of so much unnecessary suffering 
and death is not a reason for physicians and nurses 
taking the same attitude. Contrari-wise, since their 
chosen fields give them a more intimate knowledge of 
the many sources of disease springing from ignorance 
and folly, and since they are thereby more Impressed 
with the necessity of acting in advance of actual personal 
and public calamity, it is part of their duty to humanity 
to take the initiative in matters germane to their work. 
Hence if the manner of sewer-dlsposal is a shame and 
blot upon our civilization, the same strictures are appli- 
cable to physicians and (especially) nurses if fecal 
matter from a patient is infectious when disposed of. 
Rendering the stools innocuous is a small yet Imperative 
part of a nurse's daily routine, upon which the physician 
should insist, and which the nurse should conscien- 
tiously perform. At the bedside, better than anywhere 
else, we command the situation in so far as the spread of 
disease by sewage is concerned; and were disinfectioa 





AVENUES OF EXIT OF INFECTIOUS AGENTS. 159 

here always practised, we would be going a long way 
towards balancing the harm that comes from the homi- 
cidal practice of polluting our water-supplies with every 
conceivable filth. Viewed from this standpoint, there- 
fore, the stools assume in disease an importance impos- 
sible to measure. 

To disinfect the feces in every disease would be a 
waste of time and money, besides being unscientific; 
hence the reason for knowing those diseases in which 
it is called for. The germs which cause the following 
diseases are always passed in the stools : T)^hoid fever, 
Asiatic cholera, dysentery (both amoebic and bacillary), 
tuberculosis (when the bowel is affected, or the germs 
are swallowed by the consumptive), bubonic plague, 
cholera infantum, and anthrax; in small-pox, measles, 
scarlet fever, and chicken-pox, although the etiological 
factors are not known, there is no doubt that they are 
expelled in the feces. 

The parasites, and the eggs of parasites, found in the 
stools are: Eggs and segments of various tape- worms, 
eggs of round- worms (Ascaris Itdmbricoides), eggs and 
worm of pin- worm (seat worm, Oxyuris vermicularis) , 
eggs and worms of uncinaria (in hook-worm disease. 
Uncinariasis), worms of Strongyloides Intestinalis 
(Endemic diarrhoea of hot countries), eggs of trico- 
cephalus dispar, ova in Hepatica Distomiasis, ova in 
Hcemic Distomiasis {Bilharziosis, Egjrptian haematuria), 
larvae of common house-fly. 



i6o INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

The urine is a frequent avenue of exit for 
Urine. bacteria. They are found in it in practically 

all diseases in which bacteria are circulating 
in the blood (bacteriaemia, septicaemia), and also in 
infections of the genito-urinary organs generally. In 
all the eruptive fevers of known or unknown origin, the 
urine should be regarded as infectious. With reference 
to this secretion the profession learned a valuable 
lesson in the case of typhoid fever; for a long time the 
urine in this disease was entirely disregarded as a source 
of infection, yet the last few years have taught us that 
as an avenue of exit for the typhoid bacilli, it is infinitely 
more dangerous than the stools. In the stools, the 
putrefactive bacteria which are always present, are far 
more vigorous than the typhoid bacilli, so that if typhoid 
stools are allowed to stand a day or two, the typhoid 
bacilli disappear. After recovery the bacilli are not 
found in the stools unless the biliary passages are 
infected. The urine, on the other hand, during the 
whole course of the fever, constantlycontains the specific 
bacilli, often in such numbers as to make it cloudy 
(bacilluria) ; and what is far more important, the bacilli 
may be present for months and years after recovery 
unless means are taken to eradicate them. In view of 
the latter fact it is a routine practice in many hospitals to 
give during convalescence from fifteen to twenty grains 
of urotropin daily, or to wash out the bladder once a 
day, for several days after the temperature has reached 



AVENUES OF EXIT OF INFECTIOUS AGENTS. i6i 

the normal, with a solution of bichloride of mercury 
(1-20,000). 

The urine contains the infectious agents in the follow- 
ing general diseases : Tuberculosis (also consumption ?) , 
pneumonia, typhoid fever, anthrax, bubonic plague, 
influenza, malta fever, and in all other bacteriaemias or 
septicaemias which are usually classed as blood-poison- 
ing and are due to the streptococcus of erysipelas 
(streptococcus pyogenes), or to the common bacterium 
of suppuration (staphylococcus pyogenes aureus). 

In local disease of the genito-urinary 

In Urine organs the specific micro-organisms of the 

IN Local following infections are found : Gonorrhoea, 

Diseases, tuberculosis, S)^hilis (when chancer or 

secondary lesion is in the urethra), in all 

infectious diseases of the kidneys, bladder, etc. 

Parasiies Eggs of parasites in HcEmic Distomiasis 

AND Eggs of {Biharziosis, Egjrptian haematuria), em- 

Parasites bryos in haematochyluria (associated with 

IN Urine. filariasis). 

The skin gives off freely in scaling the 
Skin. infectious elements of many general dis- 
eases, among which are chiefly the agents 
of the eruptive fevers, such as scarlet fever, small-pox, 
measles, chicken-pox, erysipelas, typhus fever, rubella, 
cerebro-spinal fever (?), and s)^hilis (secondary). In 
typhoid fever, typhoid bacilli have been found repeatedly 

in the rose spots. 
II 



i62 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

In local affections of the skin, the agents 
Local in the following diseases are cast off: 

Diseases Cutaneous actinomycosis, blastomycetes, 
OF THE Skin, ring-worm of various parts of the body, 

tinea sycosis (barber's itch), favus, tinea 
versicolor, impetigo contagiosa, furunculi (boils), malig- 
nant pustule (local anthrax), erysipelas, pinto (spotted 
sickness), mycetoma (Madura foot), lupus vulgaris 
(cutaneous tuberculosis), syphilis, leprosy, yaws, glan- 
ders (farcy), etc. 

Animal parasites are found in these affec- 
Parasttes tions of the skin: Scabies, pediculosis 
OF Skin. (pubis, capitis, vestimentorum), Craw-craw, 

and Guinea-worm disease (DracunctUus 
medinensis) . The larvae of the common house-fly are 
sometimes found in wounds, and the grubs or larv« of 
special flies (bot-fly, gad-fly, etc.), in tropical and sub- 
tropical countries, quite frequently take up their abode 
beneath the skin. 

The blood as an avenue of exit for infec- 
Blood. tious agents was a sterile field for research 

until the relationship of a biting insect to a 
disease was established by the discovery, in 1893, by 
Theobald Smith, that a tick is the intermediate host for 
the micro-organism of Texas cattle fever. Long before 
this discovery physicians had suspected that mosquitoes 
played a r61e in both malaria and yellow fever — but 
the proofs were lacking in both diseases. These have 



AVENUES OF EXIT OF INFECTIOUS AGENTS. 1^3 

now been supplied, with additional evidence that another 
disease, filariasis, is conveyed in the same way. It is 
quite probable that many commimicable diseases whose 
infectious agents are still a mystery may be transmitted 
by suctorial insects — at least this is suspected — but 
these are facts for future investigations to disclose. 

It is often as important to know the manner of trans- 
mission of a disease as its cause, because this may supply 
the only data for combating it. Just this much is the 
sum of our knowledge of yellow fever, yet that it may 
be controlled has been conclusively proven by Major 
Gorgas of the U. S. Army, in Havana, Cuba, and by 
oflScers of the U. S. Public Health and Marine-Hospital 
Service, in Louisiana last year (1905). The yellow 
fever commission appointed by the Surgeon-General 
of the U. S. Army, the commission to which we owe 
our knowledge of the transmission of yellow fever by 
mosquitoes, after it had made the latter discovery, was 
able also to eliminate every other avenue of exit for the 
causative agent except the blood, and thus made clear 
the futility of attempting to circumscribe the disease by 
disinfection of secretions, fomites, etc. It further 
showed that extermination of mosquitoes offers the only 
solution of this sanitary problem, because in no other 
way can this unknown virus get out of one patient's 
body and into another. Therefore, when we say a 
micro-organism makes its exit in the blood, it is under- 
stood that this is accomplished through the bite of an 



i64 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

insect. From the blood, through the bites of suctorial 
insects, the microbes of malaria, yellow fever, filariasis 
and trypanosomiasis (sleeping-sickness), always make 
their exit. Dengue is also believed to be conveyed in 
this way. In t)rphus fever, bubonic plague, t)rphoid 
fever, and the bacteriaemias generally, there is always 
the possibility of microbes being extracted when a 
patient is bitten. Bed-bugs may suck out the spirilla 
in relapsing fever, to prove which the disease has been 
produced in a monkey by inoculating it with blood 
obtained from a bug that had bitten another monkey 
suffering from this infection. 

In suppurative processes the micro-organ- 
SuppuRA- jgj^g causing the trouble are always ex- 

pelled in the escaping material. In the fol- 
lowing specific infections the offending microbe is dis- 
charged in the pus: Er3rsipelas, anthrax (malignant 
pustule), glanders (farcy), malignant oedema, gonor- 
rhoea (ophthalmia neonatorum, urethral and uterine 
gonorrhoea), diphtheria, s)rphilis, tuberculosis, tetanus 
(lock-jaw), leprosy, actinomycosis, amoebic abscess, 
trachoma (Egyptian ophthalmia), catarrhal conjunc- 
tivitis, blastomycetis, etc. 

Non-specific suppurations are caused by a variety 
of microbes, among which the streptococcus pyogenes, 
and the several varieties of the staphylococcus, are 
principally concerned; less frequently are found the 
bacillus coli communis and the micrococcus tetragenus. 



AVENUES OF EXIT OF INFECTIOUS AGENTS. 165 

Boils, carbuncles, many pure and mixed cutaneous 
suppurations, and suppurations found elsewhere in 
the body, also come under this head. The guinea- 
worm discharges its embryos and also makes its own 
exit in a cutaneous suppuration which it excites. 

In puerperal fever (child-bed fever), the infecting 
micro-organism is discharged in the vaginal secretion, 
or from such other suppurating foci as may be estab- 
lished during the illness. In scarlet fever, small-pox, 
typhoid fever, etc., when suppurations ensue, the dis- 
charges contain the infectious agents. 

The principal communicable specific infectious dis- 
eases of the eye in which the specific micro-organisms 
are discharged in pus, are gonorrhceal ophthalmia, 
catarrhal conjunctivitis, diphtheritic conjunctivitis, 
and trachoma (Egyptian ophthalmia). 



CHAPTER VII. 

PORTALS OF ENTRY OF INFECTIOUS AGENTS 
AND OF PARASITES INTO THE BODY. 

Microbes must observe a more regular mamier of 
entering the body than leaving it, if they would produce 
disease. This is due to the fact that tissues differ in 
vulnerability to their attack, being favorable to the 
growth of some germs, and unfavorable to others. The 
same variation in susceptibility is noticed in the various 
organs of the body, and in different localities even 
where the tissues are not perceptibly dissimilar. From 
this is would appear that bacteria are preferential in 
their action, a conception that is quite generally believed. 
However, while admitting that infectious agents have a 
selective action, we must not overlook the part taken by 
the body in limiting microbic action through its secre- 
tions and anatomical peciiliarities. Thus it is well 
established that the liver, through its secretions, has 
astonishing germicidal powers, and that to this influence 
we undoubtedly owe immunity from many infections. 
Again, the comparative freedom of the eye from infec- 
tion is largely a result of winking, by which act mechan- 
ical removal of bacteria is accomplished. As a conse- 

i66 



PORTALS OF ENTRY OF INFECTIOUS AGENTS. 167 

quence of the peculiarities just explained, a microbe 
cannot do harm if it enters the body unless it finds 
lodgment in a situation favorable to its growth. In 
other words, the microbe and opportunity must meet 
for the production of disease. Example: The tetanus 
(lock-jaw) bacillus is fatal if it enters a wound however 
trivial, yet it may be swallowed (indeed, often is) 
with impunity. 

The portals of entry of infectious agents and parasites 
into the body may be included under the following 
heads : 

1. Through woimds of skin and mucous membranes. 

2. By the mouth or nose, through air. 

3. By mouth, through food and water. 

4. By genito-urinary tract. 

5. By placenta (congenital infection). 

6. Cr3rptogenic (unknown). 

The immediately accessible portions of the body to 
infectious agents are either covered with skin or mucous 
membranes, so that in the production of disease, one 
of those surfaces must be penetrated.* 

If an infection can be contracted either through 
wounds of the skin or mucous membranes, it is said to 
be inoculaUe. It is still a question in dispute whether 

'('To make this generalization clear it is only necessary to remind the 
reader that the air-passages have a mucous lining from their external 
openings down to their final terminations in air cells in the lungs; and 
that the alimentary tract is lined with an uninterrupted sheet of mucous 
membrane from inlet to outiet. 



i68 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

in this sense all infectious diseases are not inoculable, 
that is to say, whether the entrance of the agent does not 
depend upon some defect created in the integument or 
mucous membrane by another cause. Neither the 
nature of the infectious agent nor the region of the body 
which is the primary site of the disease enter into the 
discussion; nor is it disputed that penetration must 
occur; the question is, how does it happen, whether 
through the action of the bacteria themselves, or through 
the agency of another cause? If an accessory catise 
paves the way in all infections by interrupting the con- 
tinuity of a surface, then all infectious diseases are inoc- 
ulable. This latter belief, it will be recalled, is in 
entire accord with views previously expressed in the 
chapter on "The Phenomena of Infection," particularly 
in that portion which treats of the part the body plays 
in its production. 

The lesions of entrance in some diseases are more 
palpable than they are in others, and in others again, 
they can never be found ; yet that this latter fact is not 
a safe argument to use against the inoculability of a 
disease will be seen from a few illustrations. Take, 
for example, such a disease as yellow fever. Before 
the epochal work of the medical officers of the U. S. 
Army in Cuba, during 1898-99, yellow fever was 
regarded as a highly contagious disease, to guard 
against which it was deemed necessary not only to 
subject exposed individuals to the most rigid quarantine, 



PORTALS OF ENTRY OF INFECTIOUS AGENTS. 169 

but also to fumigate clothing, bedding, and even letters, 
that had been in most casual contact with the sick. 
The measures enforced indicate that the causative 
agent was believed capable of gaining an entrance into 
the body without injury to the skin or mucous mem- 
branes. We now know, however, that a lesion of the 
skin inflicted by a mosquito is its only means of entrance 
(although we are yet in the dark as to the nature of the 
agent), and that, therefore, all former methods of pre- 
vention were futile in so far as control of the disease was 
concerned. Into such gross errors is it possible to 
fall when we apply methods of proven value in known 
to unknown diseases! Another case in point: Take 
typhoid fever; the t)rphoid bacillus enters the body by 
the mouth in food or drink. The most obvious lesions 
of the disease are seen in ulcers of the l)nnph nodes 
(glands) of the lower part of the small and the beginning 
of the large intestines. To affect these results the 
bacilli pass through the mucous membrane of the 
bowels, where they can be seen with the microscope in 
stained sections after death. The specific bacilli, 
however, do not stop in the sub-mucosa (sub-mucous 
tissue) but pass from here into the blood, where active 
growth and toxin formation is carried on. In other 
words, typhoid fever belongs to the bacteriaemias, a 
class of diseases characterized, as we have seen, by the 
presence of bacteria in the blood. Usually the more 
obvious s)nnptoms of t)rphoid fever are those referable 



I70 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

to the bowels; but the intestinal features may be com- 
pletely wanting, as has been repeatedly proven by post 
mortem examinations. Such cases are usually reported 
as "Typhoid fever without intestinal lesions." A 
study of t)rphoid fever, therefore, teaches that, while 
the agents of a disease may depend for entrance into 
the blood upon a gross or macroscopic lesion of a 
mucous membrane, they also may enter through a nan- 
demonstrable portal. It might be asked at this point, 
"why do not the bacteria which get into the intestinal 
tract with food, and those which have their habitat there, 
often penetrate the mucosa and cause disease?" The 
answer to which would be, they do, far oftener than is 
generally supposed; in fact the intestinal tract is re- 
garded as the chief portal of entry for many diseases 
for which no atria can be found (cryptogenic infections). 
That some bacteria can enter certain tissues and 
attack certain localities more readily than others is 
admitted, because it has been experimentally proven. 
But between experiments, no matter how cimningly 
devised, and disease, as ordinarily contracted, there is a 
wide gap. When an animal or person is subjected to 
the germs of a disease, many million times the number 
of bacteria are applied than are ever present under 
natural conditions. Under such circumstances mere 
contact of these germs with the right mucous surface is 
sufl&cient to provoke disease. This is the case, for 
example, with the diphtheria bacillus, accidental infec- 



PORTALS OF ENTRY OF INFECTIOUS AGENTS. 171 

tions with which having occurred in laboratories by a 
culture being unwittingly drawn up into the mouth. 
But under natural conditions of infection, where only 
casual contact between a patient and another person 
takes place, how can we believe that very many germs 
reach the throat through inhalation? Certainly they 
are by far not so nimierous in air as when grown in 
cultures! Furthermore, in every disease, we concede 
the co-operation of contributing or predisposing causes : 
enlarged tonsils and adenoids in diphtheria; exposure 
and alcoholism in pneumonia; indigestion, fatigue, 
and over-ripe fruits, in cholera, etc. Why ? if the germs 
acting alone are sufl&cient? 

Finally, only a limited number of persons exposed 
to an infectious disease contract it, a fact which cannot 
be explained in the case of local diseases on grounds of 
greater general predisposition. In diphtheria, gonor- 
rhoea, cholera, etc., might it not be because in those 
persons that we say are susceptible, the predisposing 
causes ultimately resolve themselves into invisible 
breaks or ruptures in the continuity of mucous sur- 
faces ? 

The subject of the inoculability of diseases has been 
thus fully discussed because of our classification of the 
portals of entry. We have endeavored to show that 
our first group, "through wounds of skin or mucous 
membranes," might be made to include practically all 
diseases of known etiology. But such a division is 



172 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

ill-suited to our purpose, which is to direct attention 
to the more obvious atria, and also to those portions of 
the body as are most likely to be the primary or initial 
seat of the various infections. S)rphilis well illustrates 
our aim. Syphilis is a t)rpical inoculable disease, a 
break in the integument or a mucous surface being 
required for entrance of the virus. But if we only 
treated of its portals of entry imder lesions of the skin 
and mucous membranes, data of the highest importance 
would not be included. Nothing, for example, would 
be said of the fact that the initial infection is usually 
found upon the genitalia, not that the infection is 
hereditary. Hence, the reason for employing a classi- 
fication apparently illogical. 

The more obvious portals are those easiest remem- 
bered, and the most practical; and therefore, imder the 
inoculable diseases are placed those which are either 
contracted through visible lesions, or can be inoculated, 
although under natural conditions this may not seem to 
occur;* and under the other divisions are grouped 
those which experience has taught attack one portion 
of the body rather than another. Obviously under such 
a classification, a disease will often be found under two 
or more heads. 

♦Example: — Small-pox is ordinarily contracted by contact of an un- 
vaccinated person with a patient or fomites. That it is directly inocu- 
lable, the earlier practice of variolation, introduced into England by 
Lady Mary Worthey Montague in 1727, shows. 



PORTALS OF ENTRY OF INFECTIOUS AGENTS. 173 

The strictly inoculable infectious diseases 
Skin and are tetanus (lock-jaw), S)rphilis (acquired), 
Mucous lupus vulgaris (cutaneous tuberculosis). 
Membranes, erysipelas, actinomycosis (cutaneous), 

glanders (farcy), leprosy (?), t)rphus fever, 
plague, anthrax (malignant pustule), hydrophobia, 
mountain fever (?), foot and mouth disease, malarial 
fever, yellow fever, filariasis (elephantiasis) blastomy- 
cetes, mycetoma (Madura foot), small-pox, and soft 
chancer. 

Vegetable parasites are the cause of ring-worms of 
various parts (tinea tonsurans, tinea circinata), barber's 
itch (tinea sycosis), tinea versicolor, pinto (spotted sick- 
ness), yaws, and craw-craw. Thrush is a vegetable 
parasitic affection of the mucous membrane of the 
tongue and cheeks of infants. 

Animal parasites which gain entrance through the 
skin are represented by the embryos of the uncinaria 
(parasite of hook-worm disease). 

Parasitic insects of the skin are Sarcoptes scabiei 
(itch-mite) ; the head, body, and pubic louse; the larva of 
the horse bot-fly (gastrophilus equi), which causes 
"Creeping Eruption;" mosquitoes, which inoculate the 
agents of malaria, yellow fever and filariasis, and prob- 
ably that of dengue; and the fly glossina which prob- 
ably inoculates the parasites of trypanosomiasis 
(sleeping-sickness) . 

The mouth is a portal of entry for infectious agents 



174 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

and parasites in both air and foods, and in the case of 
many diseases both methods of conveyance are possible. 
Yet because some diseases are nearly alwa5rs, or even 
exclusively, contracted in one of these ways, it has 
seemed best to make a division of diseases into those 
inspired, and those taken in with foods and water. 
For example, neither Asiatic cholera nor dysentery are 
ever air-borne; nor is pneumonia contracted in either 
food or drink ; yet in diphtheria, scarlet fever, small-pox, 
etc., both air and foods are fruitful sources of infection. 
The air, however, as a source of contagion, has been 
much exaggerated in the past, particularly where trans- 
mission of a disease over great distances has been laid 
at its door. With the exception of diseases conveyed 
by insects, such as mosquitoes, which may be blown 
by winds, there is really no readily communicable 
disease which is dangerous to others in the open air 
at a few yards distance. The fear that many persons 
have of passing a house where a contagious disease 
exists is without foundation. Carelessness within the 
house may be responsible for every room being danger- 
ous — ^but that does not aflfect the air outside. When 
carefully investigated the so-called air-borne infections 
are discovered to have been carried by a third 
person, or by some article used and soiled in the sick- 
room. Usually it is the former. The truth is graphic- 
ally presented by Dr. Rosenau who quotes Dr. 
J. H. White, ^^that infectious diseases are more often 



Mouth 



PORTALS OF ENTRY OF INFECTIOUS AGENTS. 175 

conveyed from place to place in two shoes than in any 

other way." Therefore, air-bome, as applied to a 

disease, rather emphasizes the fact that the contagion 

enters by way of the respiratory passages, than that it 

is widely diffused in air. 

By the mouth and nose through air may 

^^^ enter the infectious agents in small-pox, 

AND Nose ... i i .r 

THROUGH chicken-pox, measles, scarlet fever, mumps, 

Air. whooping-cough, pneumonia, tuberculosis, 

diphtheria, plague, anthrax, epidemic cere- 
bro-spinal meningitis (?), rubella and influenza. 

A large number of the infectious and para- 
sitic diseases are contracted exclusively 
p by the pathogenic agents entering the body 

Water. ^^ foods and water. This method of infec- 

tion is also by no means unusual in certain 
diseases for which the respiratory passages are the ordi- 
nary portals of entry. Foods and water, as a rule, offer 
excellent pabula for infectious agents and parasites, 
and are therefore quite frequently the means by which 
diseases are spread. The pollution of drinking-water by 
sewage, and the harm arising therefrom, has already 
been considered. Foods in relation to disease, however, 
requires some further elucidation; and while it is not 
our aim to take up all foods which serve as vehicles for 
infectious and parasitic agents, the manner of con- 
tamination of some of those consumed daily will serve 
to illustrate, in a general way, how these are a source of 



176 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

disease. Furthermore, the movement of food-stuffs 
from one part of a country to another, or from one 
country to another, will be sufficiently dealt with to 
show the possibilities of diseases being literally picked 
up, carried hundreds of miles, and transplanted in 
regions where they previously did not exist. 

Mention has been made of the manner in which 
t)rphoid fever, cholera, dysentery, etc., are contracted 
from drinking polluted water. Polluted water, how- 
ever, although it may not be used for drinking purposes, 
may nevertheless be a source of danger from certain 
foods which grow in it and are consumed raw. This 
danger has been realized a number of times in the case 
of oysters and clams; and while water-cress has not 
yet been definitely incriminated, there is no reason 
why it may not be a menace to health in the same 
way. 

Fruits and vegetables are sometimes polluted by the 
fertilizer, especially where human excrement is used to 
enrich the soil. In the United States this practice is 
not so common as in certain European countries, nor 
in the latter countries as in China, where it is the rule. 
But the number of Chinese truck-farmers in the 
United States and Cuba is not small, and steps should 
be taken to illegalize the use of human excrement for 
fertilizer unless it has been made innocuous by various 
approved methods. Only a few years ago, during the 
American occupation of Cuba, several Army Surgeons 



PORTALS OF ENTRY OF INFECTIOUS AGENTS. 177 

made the filthy fanning customs of the Chinese the sub- 
ject of special reports. It is scarcely necessary to 
mention the way human excrement used as fertilizer is 
dangerous, as it differs in no respect from fecal pollution 
of water; nor that the chief danger comes from vege- 
tables, berries, and salads which are eaten raw. 

Pollution of berries, etc., may also come from the 
persons employed in gathering them. The people 
engaged in this kind of labor, while they are on the one 
hand drawn from the most densely ignorant and un 
cleanest of foreigners, are on the other denied for weeks 
the most primitive accessories of civilization. Whole 
families, men, women, and children, in the early spring 
begin a migration which starts where the season opens 
soonest, and ends in the fall where it closes last. Dur- 
ing this, the warmest part of the year, they live in the 
fields in tents or covered wagons, working from sunrise 
to sunset with only such conveniences as their tempo- 
rary abiding-places afford. They ask very little in the 
way of comforts and get less. A bath to most of them 
is ordinarily obnoxious. From their bunks day after 
day they go to their work in the dawning morning, 
unwashed and uncombed, to return at night to sleep, 
too exhausted to make an effort to be clean. Relief 
from physiological emergencies is sought where they 
work, and quickly too — for the remuneration is "so 
much the measure." Sickness often prevails in these 
camps, typhoid fever, small-pox, scarlet fever, etc., 

IS 



178 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

and many workers harbor intestinal parasites. Need 
more be said of the probability of disease being served 
at our tables with fresh fruits and vegetables ? Could 
the egg of a tape- worm find a more toothsome vehicle ? 
And yet there are those who insist on eating berries 
unwashed because they lose a little flavor in the wash- 
ing! 

Some articles of food are more favorable to the growth 
of bacteria than others. MUk is the best. This is 
unfortunate, because, besides being a natural food for 
children and the greatest boon in sickness, it is next 
to bread the most-used article of diet. Because it 
furnishes such an excellent pabulum for bacteria, it is a 
frequent vehicle by which they are carried. Sickness 
in a milker, or in a dair3nnan's family, or the washing 
of milk-cans in polluted water, has time and again 
caused epidemics of scarlet fever, diphtheria, and 
typhoid fever, a fact which calls for the enactment of 
rigid laws regulating the production, handling, and 
sale of milk, and severe penalties for infractions of this 
law. 

For a long time it has been the custom, when a few 
cases of typhoid fever occur in a community, to imme- 
diately impugn the character of the water-supply. 
This attitude of mind is a legacy of the time when pol- 
luted water was believed to be the only source of this 
infection. Where large numbers of cases occur, and 
especially if they are not limited to one neighborhood, 



PORTALS OF ENTRY OF INFECTIOUS AGENTS. 179 

it is a wise precaution to suspect the drinking-water. 
But where cases are reported sporadically, especially 
in communities which have a mimicipal water system, 
it is more logical to seek the source elsewhere. The 
modem method of food distribution is a marvelous 
development, that is comparable to other inventions of 
the 19th Century. Through it perishable articles are 
not only distributed from one point where the supply 
exceeds the demand to others where they are needed; 
but they are also held, in the case of certain foods, a 
year or more — if the supply is too abundant. Nor is 
the distribution of such things limited to the farther- 
most boundaries of one country, but they are also 
shipped from one country to another across the widest 
seas. All this has come about through the expansion 
of the cold storage business, and the use of refrigerator 
cars, and cold storage plants on steam-ships. There 
is a large and ever increasing demand for various perish- 
able articles of food out of season, so that there is a 
constant movement of supplies from one region to 
another. Furthermore, this demand has stimulated 
the speculative zeal of those engaged in the cold storage 
business, with the result that "in season" enormous 
storing of perishable foods is conducted. So great at 
these times is the demand for these commodities for 
storage, and for shipment to other parts of the country, 
that in many localities where they are grown it is im- 
possible to purchase in the local market either fresh 



i8o INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

fowl, eggs, milk, butter, fruits and game. Hence it is 
probably true, although we haven't]the support of figures 
for the assertion, that more of the above mentioned 
foods are eaten out of season than in. 

Our reason for dwelling upon this phase of modem 
economic life is to draw attention to the probability 
of communicable diseases being carried with foods 
from points widely separated, and the difficulty of 
tracing those so carried to their source. Refrigeration 
does not necessarily kill infectious agents and animal 
parasites, indeed, we have already called attention to 
the dangers of ice in relation to typhoid fever and cholera; 
so that through this system some contaminated article 
such as cream, may first be shipped five hundred miles 
to a creamery, churned into butter there, held in 
storage a few months, and finally be shipped another 
thousand miles, or across the ocean to Europe. The 
possible contamination of fruits, berries, and vegetables 
by those that pluck them has been considered a few 
lines above ; in the refrigerator car, therefore, we see a 
way by which infectious or parasitic agents contamina- 
ting such products may be transported. 

By the mouth through foods and water, are taken in 
the agents of typhoid fever, Asiatic cholera, small-pox, 
measles, scarlet fever, tuberculosis, diphtheria, plague, 
anthrax, s)rphilis, amoebic and bacillary dysentery, 
actinomycosis, milk sickness, and aphthous fever (foot 
and mouth disease). 



PORTALS OF ENTRY OF INFECTIOUS AGENTS. i8i 

The foUowing eggs, embryos, or parasites 
Parasites are taken into the body with foods or water : 
OR Eggs of Eggs of beef tape- worm (Tcmia saginata) ; 
Parasites, eggs and larvae of pork tape-worm {tcmia 

solium) ; eggs of Taenia echinococcus (dog 
tape- worm), water; eggs of round worm (ascaris lumbri- 
coides), water; eggs of pin-worm (Seat- worm, Oxyuris 
vermicidaris), water; larvae of Guinea- worm (Dracun- 
cuius medinensis)y water; larvae of trichinae (Trichinia- 
sis), pork; larvae of Uncinaria (hook-worm disease), 
water and soil; worm of Strongyloides Intestinalis 
(endemic diarrhoea of hot countries), water (?); eggs 
of tricocephalus dispar; eggs of parasite causing Bilhar- 
ziosis (Egyptian haematuria), (?); larvae of common 
house-fly. 

The commonest infectious diseases of the 

Gentto- genito-urinary organs are the so-called 

URINARY "venereal diseases," gonorrhoea and syph- 

Tract. iiis. Both of these infections, however, 

may be found elsewhere upon the body in 

persons innocent of wrong-doing. In such cases the 

name of the disease is qualified by the word insontium 

written after it. In the female the vulva, vagina, 

urethra, and cervix of the uterus, are often the seat of 

gonorrhoea and syphilis, less often, of tuberculosis. 

Following abortion, or delivery at term, the uterus is 

frequently infected with the streptococcus of erysipelas, 

the colon bacillus (from feces), and the common mi- 



i82 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

crobes which cause suppuration. Occasionally the ex- 
ternal genitals are the seal of diphtheria. 

In the male, syphilitic and gonorrhoeal lesions of the 
outside of the penis are common. The interior of the 
urethra is seldom affected by any other disease besides 
gonorrhoea. However, chancer (syphilis) of the inside 
of the urethra is sometimes encountered. 

The bladder in both sexes is frequently the seat of 
inflammations (cystitis), the infection very often being 
carried into the bladder by catheterization. Besides 
getting into the bladder by way of the urethra, however, 
the infection may come from the blood by way of the 
kidneys. Tuberculosis of the bladder, a not uncommon 
infection, usually arises in this way. 
Animal The round worm has been found in the 

Parasites, vagina. 

Only one congenital disease occurs with 
Congenital ^^^ degree of frequency, namely, syphilis, 
p^ Nevertheless, a child may be bom with 

Infection, almost any of the infectious diseases if 

the mother is suffering at the time from the 
same. Thus, in the new-bom has occurred typhoid 
fever, small-pox, scarlet fever, tuberculosis, etc. In 
the case of tuberculosis, however, it is surprising how 
very rarely the disease is found in the children of a 
consumptive mother; in fact congenital tuberculosis 
is so uncommon, that tuberculosis is not regarded by the 
profession as an hereditary disease. 






PORTALS OF ENTRY OF INFECTIOUS AGENTS. 183 

The discharges from syphilitic lesions in the infant 
are highly dangerous to everyone who handles it except 
its mother. In such children sores of the mouth are 
common, and wet-nurses have frequently been known 
to contract the disease from suckling them. 

Cryptogenic infections refer to those deep- 
Cryptogenic, seated affections for which a portal of 

entry cannot be found. Endocarditis (in- 
flammation of the heart valves), osteomyelitis (inflam- 
mation of bone), etc., are illustrations of this type of 
infection. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

PORTALS OF ENTRY AND AVENUES OF EXIT 
OF MICRO-ORGANISMS IN THE VARIOUS 

DISEASES. 

Actinomycosis ("lumpy-jaw," "wooden tongue"); 
disease of man and domestic animals, particularly 
bovines. 

(a) Cause: Actinomyces bovis (ray-fungus); forms 

spores. 

(b) Localized: Lungs, bowels, subcutaneous tissues; 

often about jaw or tongue. 

(c) Entry: Through mouth and nose with food; 

through wounds. 

(d) Exit: Sputum, feces, and pus from lesions. 

(e) Contracted : Doubtful whether can be communi- 

cated directly, either from animal to 
man, or from man to animal. Barley, oats, 
or rye, seem to be vehicles for the fungus. 

(f ) Disinfection : Since the actinomyces form spores, 

disinfecting agents are same as for anthrax 

and tetanus. 

The ray-fungus can be seen with the naked eye in 

the pus and secretions of lesions as whitish or yellow- 

184 



MICRO-ORGANISMS IN VARIOUS DISEASES, 185 

ish bodies that have the appearance of j&ne grains of 
sulphur; seen best if a small quantity of the pus is 
pressed between two slides or watch crystals. 

Anthrax (Wool-sorter's Disease, malignant pus- 
tule, splenic fever) ; disease of man and domestic ani- 
mals, especially sheep and cattle. 

(a) Cause: Bacillus anthracis; forms spores^ 

(b) Localization: Subcutaneous tissues (malignant 

pustule) ; lungs (wool-sorter's disease) ; in- 
testinal tract; all of these lead to bacter- 
iaemia (bacteria in blood) in vast majority 
of cases. 

(c) Entry: Through wounds or abrasions; through 

mouth, eating meat or drinking milk of 
infected animals; through respiratory tract 
(inhaled in dust — ^wool-sorter's disease). 

(d) Exit: Expectoration in pulmonic form; pus 

from abscess in local form; discharges 
from bowels in intestinal form. 

(e) Contracted: By inhalation in sorting wool of 

infected animals; by abrasion or wound 
in handling flesh or hides of infected ani^ 
mals; by eating flesh or drinking milk 
of diseased animals; by the soiling of 
wounds or food-stuffs by infected flies. 

(f) Disinfection and Prophylaxis: Forms spores, 

therefore unusual precautions are to be 
used. Bum cadavers, and contaminated 



i86 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES, 

bedding, cloths, etc., where this is possible; 
where destruction is not feasible, use 
(i) Super-heated steam (15 pounds pressure), 15 
minutes. 

(2) Tricresol, or lysol, 2 per cent solution, for two 

hours. 

(3) Bichloride of mercury (1-500), for one hour. 

(4) Formalin, 15 per cent solution, one and one- 

half hours. 

(5) Boiling water, or steam, for two hours. 

Bubonic Plague (la peste, black death, etc.). 

(a) Cause: Bacillus pestis; non-sporogenous. 

(b) Localized: Skin and subcutaneous tissues; 

lymph-glands; lungs; and intestinal tract. 

(c) Entry : Wounds of skin ; nose and mouth through 

air; mouth in food and water. 

(d) Exit: In any of the discharges from situation 

where disease is localized; therefore, sup- 
purations, suppurating buboes, abscesses, 
blisters, sputum, vomit, feces, urine. 

(e) Contracted: By inhalation through contact 

with sick; through woimds contaminated 
or caused by infected fleas, flies, ants, 
etc., also food and water contaminated by 
the sick, or infected vermin, e.g., rats, 
mice, etc. 

Note : — Use all chemical disinfectants at or near the boUing point. 



MICRO-ORGANISMS IN VARIOUS DISEASES. 187 

(f) Disinfection: Must be thorough; bacillus not 

difficult to destroy; disinfect sputum, 
dejecta, urine, etc., with 5 per cent carbolic, 
3-5 per cent formalin, 2 per cent tricresol,* 
or boiling water the same as for other 
non-sporogenous bacteria. Wash body of 
patient, hands, and objects with i-iooo 
bichloride of mercury. Fumigate with sul- 
phur dioxide on account of its destructive 
action on vermin. 

(g) Prophylaxis : Vermin, particularly rats and mice, 

are susceptible to plague ; indeed, the former 
are believed to be the principle carriers of it. 
They infect the ground, dwellings, foods, and 
water. Therefore, safety lies in the destruc- 
tion of all vermin in the houses. As dogs 
and cattle are also susceptible to the disease, 
they should be carefully protected from 
exposure. Screen dwelling and rooms; 
since the ground becomes infected by rats, 
and infected excreta, and because wounds 
of the feet and legs are frequent portals of 
entry for the specific bacillus, the constant 
wearing of shoes and leggins is a wise 
prophylactic. 
The pneumonic form of plague is especially danger- 
ous to attendants because the bacilli are thrown out 
in the spray in coughing and sneezing. Eat liothing 



i88 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

raw, such as rnDk, butter, cheese, etc. ; serve everything 
hot. Eschew all fresh fruits and vegetaUes. Neither 
wash in, nor drink of, unboQed water. The bodies of 
those succumbing to the disease should be cremated. 
Clothing, sheets, etc., may be disinfected with solu- 
tions above given for sputum. Mop all surfaces in 
the sick-room frequently with a solution of bichloride 
of mercury (i-iooo). Rigid isolation and quarantine 
should be instituted. 

Epidemic Cerebro-spinal Meningitis. 

(a) Cause: Diplococcus intraceUularis meningitidis; 

non-sporulating. 

(b) Localization: Membranes of brain and spinal 

cord. 

(c) Entry: Probably nose by inhalation. 

(d) Exit: Probably nasal secretions. 

(e) Contracted : Does not seem directly contagious 

from sick to well, nor by fomites. 

(f) Disinfection and Prophylaxis : Disinfect all secre- 

tions and discharges, and all objects that 
have been in contact with patient. Pro- 
tect patient, and all articles that have been 
in contact with patient, from insects ; there- 
fore screen against flies, mosquitoes, etc. 

Chicken-pox (varicella). 

(a) Cause: Not known. 

(b) Localization: Same as small-pox. 



MICRO-ORGANISMS IN VARIOUS DISEASES. 189 

(c) Entry : Probably through respiratory tract (inha- 

lation). 

(d) Exit : Exhalations from lungs and skin, particu- 

larly in the dried scales of the latter ; in all 
secretions and excretions, therefore, spu- 
tum, feces, urine, tears, nose, etc. 

(e) Contracted: Highly contagious. 

(f) Disinfection: Same as applied to small-pox. 

(g) Prophylaxis: Same as in small-pox. 

Cholera. 

(a) Cause: Spirillum cholerce Asiaticce (Koch), 

^ ' comma bacillus ; ' ' non-sporogenous . 

(b) Localization: Small and large intestines. 

(c) Entry: Mouth in water and food. 

(d) Exit: Discharges from bowels, sometimes in 

vomit. 

(e) Contracted : Is usually water-borne infection, but 

may come from foods contaminated either 
by soiled hands, human fertilizer, or by in- 
sects which have been in contact with dis- 
charges containing the spirilla. 

(f) Disinfection: Spirillum has slight resisting powers, 

65^ C. (149^ F.) kills in five minutes, 100^ C. 
(212^ F.), destroying it at once; disinfect 
stools and vomited matter with 5 per cent 
solution formalin, 5 per cent solution car- 
bolic acid, 2 per cent tricresol, or twice their 



I90 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

amount with milk of lime ; treat bed-linen, 
etc., same as in typhoid; fumigation not 
necessary if appropriate sick-room precau- 
tions are taken. 

(g) Prophylaxis: When cholera prevails, do not eat 
any fruits or vegetables raw; boil all 
water, whether used for drinking purposes 
or for washing of utensils; cook all foods 
well, and leave nothing exposed to the air, 
best to serve everything hot; protect sick- 
room, and all houses from flies, and keep 
free from insects. If these precautions 
are followed, one can live in a cholera 
infected town and nurse cholera patients 
without danger of contracting the disease. 

Dengue (break-bone fever, dandy fever). 

(a) Cause: Unknown. 

(b) Entry and Exit: Not known. 

(c) Disinfection: Not practised, since as far as 

known it never proves fatal. 

Diphtheria. 

(a) Cause: Bacillus diphtheric^ (Klebs-Loeffler bac- 

illus). 

(b) Localization: All mucous membranes, usually 

tonsils, phar5nix, and anterior and pos- 
terior nares; occurs in larynx, when it is 
called membranous croup; sometimes seen 
on the vulva; may infect wounds. 



MICRO-ORGANISMS IN VARIOUS DISEASES. 191 

(c) Entry: By mouth and nose through air, or by 

mouth through contaminated foods or 
objects; only the air around the patient 
is dangerous, which is made infectious 
through coughing, sneezing, and careless 
disposal of secretions from infected por- 
tion; through wounds uncommon. 

(d) Exit: Discharges from nose, mouth, pharynx 

and laiynx; also from eye and vulva if 
disease situated there. 

(e) Contracted: Is highly contagious, spread by 

contact with the sick chiefly, to a less 
extent through fomites; kissing, handker- 
chiefs, towels, toys, etc., may all convey 
the infection. 

(f) Disinfection: Boiling water kills the diphtheria 

bacillus at once; direct sun-light is also 
effective in about an hour ; disinfect sputum, 
nasal discharge, linens, utensils, etc., with 
boiling water, or with tricresol (2 per cent), 
formalin (5 per cent), carbolic acid (5 per 
cent) ; wipe all surfaces in room (including 
floor) with bichloride of mercury (i-iooo) 
daily, fumigate with sulphur or formalde- 
hyde. 

(g) Prophylaxis: Isolation of sick, no matter how 

slight the infection, since there is no ques- 
tion that diphtheria is spread by the mild 



192 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

or unsuspected cases; those in contact 
with the patient should use antiseptic 
gargle, disinfect hands, and avoid getting 
in the way of spray of expectoration ; fumi- 
gate with sulphur or formaldehyde. 

Amoebic Dysentery (chronic tropical dysentery). 

(a) Cause: Amoeba dysentericB, an animal parasite. 

(b) Localization: Intestinal tract. 

(c) Entry: Mouth through water, fresh fruits, and 

vegetables. 

(d) Exit: Evacuations from bowels. 

(e) Contracted: From infected water, etc. 

(f) Disinfection : Only the stools need be disinfected, 

using the same solutions as in typhoid. 

(g) Prophylaxis: Boil all water where the disease 

prevails. 

Bacillary Dysentery (acute epidemic dysentery). 

(a) Cause: Bacillus dysentericB (Shiga); non-sporog- 

enous. 

(b) Localization: Intestines. 

(c) Entry : Mouth, through water and foods. 

(d) Exit: In evacuations from the bowels; may be 

present in vomit. 

(e) Contracted: Same as typhoid. 

(f) Disinfection: As far as known only the stools 

have to be disinfected; the bacillus has 
about the same resisting qualities as the 



MICRO-ORGANISMS IN VARIOUS DISEASES. 193 

typhoid bacillus, the strengths given for the 
various disinfectants in typhoid being 
sufficient, 
(g) Prophylaxis: When the disease prevails boil all 
water and cook well all foods; eat neither 
fruits nor vegetables raw; use same pre- 
cautions as in typhoid. 

Erysipelas. 

(a) Cause: Streptococcus pyogenes; does not form 

spores. 

(b) Localization: Skin, or any wound that becomes 

infected with the micro-organism. 

(c) Entry : Wounds or abrasions of skin and mucous 

membranes. 

(d) Exit : In pus and secretions from the seat of the 

inflammation ; also probably in the desqua- 
mating skin from an inflamed area. 

(e) Contracted : Is highly contagious to any one with 

a wound; to a woman about to be confined, 
or in the pusrperium; may be conveyed by 
fomites, instruments, etc. 

(f) Disinfection: 100° C. (212° F.) moist, kills the 

streptococcus at once; all discharges 
should be disinfected with the solutions in 
the strengths recommended ; urine should 
certainly be disinfected ; room, patient, and 

bedding, clothing, etc., should b? treated 

13 



194 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

as for small-pox; fumigate with formaki^ 
hyde or sulphur, 
(g) Prophylaxis: Isolate the patient and his attendant; 
latter should have nothing to do with opera- 
tions, confinements, etc., during the period 
of attendance on a case of er3rsipelas, and 
for two weeks thereafter; during the lat- 
ter period, daily disinfection of the hands, 
hair, and person generally should be fd- 
lowed; room where patient has been 
should be thoroughly cleansed and dis- 
infected. 

Glanders. 

(a) Cause: Bacillus maUei; is non-sporogenous. 

(b) Localization: Exposed surfaces of the body 

(farcy), or mucous membranes of the nose. 

(c) Entry: Wounds of skin, or mucous membrane 

of nose. 

(d) Exit : Purulent discharges from nose ; ulcers and 

abscesses; expectoration; urine. 

(e) Contracted : Usually by contact with diseased an- 

imals (horses and asses), or hides of same 
through abrasions of skin. 

(f) Disinfection: Easily destroyed by boiling, or the 

usual strengths of carbolic acid, formalin, 
or tricresol. 

(g) Prophylaxis: Consists in the destruction of all 



MICRO-ORGANISMS IN VARIOUS DISEASES. 195 

diseased animals, and thorough disinfection 
of the discharges and soiled dressings of 
infected individuals. 

Gonorrhoea. 

(a) Cause: Micrococcus gonorrhwce (Neisser); non- 

sporogenous. 

(b) Localized: Urethra (gonorrhoea, specific urethri- 

tis, clap); eye (gonorrhoeal ophthalmia, 
ophthalmia neonatorum); vagina; blood; 
joints; etc. 

(c) Entry: Urethra, eye, vagina, occasionally 

wounds. 

(d) Exit: In suppurations from diseased tissues or 

organs. 

(e) Contracted : In urethra and vagina from irregu- 

lar intercourse; in eyes of adults from pol- 
luted fingers or towels, etc.; in new-bom 
during birth; in female children the vagina 
is infected through soiled sponges, wash- 
cloths, etc. 

(f) Disinfection: Micro-organism has slight resist- 

ance; boiling kills it at once. Ordinary 
disinfectants effective in the percentages 
in which used for vegetative forms of other 
bacteria. 

(g) Prophylaxis: Males with acute or chronic gon- 

orrhoea (gleet) should not marry until 



196 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

cured. Individuals with the disease should 
be warned of the awful danger consequent 
upon eye infection. The children bom of 
immoral mothers, and all bom among the 
lowest classes, should have instilled into 
each eye immediately after birth one to two 
drops of a I per cent solution of nitrate of 
silver. 

Hydrophobia (Rabies, Lyssa). 

(a) Cause: Unknown. 

(b) Localized: Wounds, primarily; secondarily, brain 

and spinal cord. 

(c) Entry: Through wounds. 

(d) Exit: Saliva. 

(e) Contracted: Through bite of mad animal, such 

as dog, wolf, cat, etc. Novi says, "that 
midges and flies are capable of conveying 
the infection." 

(f) Disinfection: Saliva, and linens, beddings, etc., 

soiled by saliva, should be boiled, or dis- 
infected with one of the solutions advised 
for other diseases. 

(g) Prophylaxis : Kill all mad animals, and all others 

bitten by same. Dogs should be muzzled. 
Bites of all animals should be carefully 
washed and thoroughly cauterized with 
concentrated carbolic acid, or a glowing 



MICRO-ORGANISMS IN VARIOUS DISEASES. 197 

poker. Previously, oral suction may be 
practised. Keep wound open for from five 
to six weeks. 

Influenza (La Grippe, Russian fever). 

(a) Cause : Bacterium infltienztB; is non-sporogenous. 

(b) Localized: Throat; nose; lungs; blood. 

(c) Entry: By air through mouth and nose. 

(d) Exit: Discharges from nose, throat, and lungs. 

(e) Contracted : Probably entirely by contact with the 

sick. 

(f) Disinfection: Bacilli are quickly destroyed by 

even weak solutions of the ordinary disin- 
fectants; at once by boiling; fumigate with 
formaldehyde or sulphur. 

(g) Prophylaxis : Since influenza is a serious disease 

in the case of the very young and the aged, 
and furnishes a large proportion of the 
mortality at these periods of life, the nasal 
and bronchial secretions should be care- 
fully disinfected in every case. 

Leprosy. 

(a) Cause: Bacillus leprcB; non-sporogenous. 

(b) Localized: Mucous membranes and skin gener- 

ally; nervous system. 

(d) Exit: In suppurations from broken-down nodules 

of nose, mouth and skin. 

(e) Contracted: Contracted with difficulty. Long, 



198 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

intimate contact seems essential. Atten- 
dants need have no fear of contracting the 
disease, if reasonable precautions are 
taken. 

(f ) Disinfection : Not known, since germ has never 

been cultivated outside the body; prob- 
ably same as for tuberculosis. 

(g) Prophylaxis: Cleanliness; disinfection of dis- 

charges from suppurations and soiled 
linens, etc. ; segregation of lepers. 

Madtira Foot (mycetoma, Madura disease, pied de 
Madura). 

(a) Cause: Streptothrix madurae, forms spores (?). 

(b) Localization: Usually feet, but may aflfect other 

portions of body. 

(c) Entry: Through wounds in skin. 

(d) Exit: In discharges from broken-down nodules. 

(e) Contracted: In countries where the disease is 

common, is attributed to prick of a thorn ; 
is probably not communicated from man 
to man. 

(f) Disinfection: Should be same as for anthrax 

and tetanus. 

Malarial Fever (ague, intermittent fever). 

(a) Cause: Hcematozoa malaricB (sporozoa). 

(b) Localized : In blood and tissues. 

(c) Entry: Only through bites of mosquitoes. 



MICRO-ORGANISMS IN VARIOUS DISEASES. 199 

(d) Exit : In the blood solely through bites of mos- 

quitoes. 

(e) Contracted: By being bitten by that species of 

mosquito (Anopheles) which acts as host 
for the parasite. 

(f ) Disinfection : Consists in the destruction of mos- 

quitoes by an insecticide in the bed-room 
of the sick. Pyrethrum, two pounds to each 
one thousand cubic feet. Sulphur, one 
pound to each two thousand cubic feet. 
Where sulphur used, two hours' exposure 
sufficient, and moisture (which decolorizes 
and destroys fabrics) not necessary. As 
pyrethrum only stuns the knats they must 
be gathered up and burned after fumigat- 
ing. 

(g) Prophylaxis : Where malaria is prevalent, screen 

rooms and houses with fine mesh screens 
to keep mosquitoes out; chief danger is at 
night, since anopheles is nocturnal in 
its habits. Anopheles breeds in shallow 
puddles and ditches, in which places the 
young can be destroyed by sprinkling sur- 
face of water with coal-oil about every two 
weeks. Two grains of quinine three times 
daily is also a wise precaution. 

Measles. 

(a) Cause: Unknown. 



^oo llSTFECtlOUS AlfD 1>ARAS1t1C DlSfiAglKS. 

(b) Localization: Eyes, nose, mouth, throat, and 

skin. 
{t) Eirtry: Probably air borne to mouth or nose, 
{cl) Exit : Oculo-nasal secretions, saliva, breath and 

desquamated skin. 

(e) Contracted: By contact with sick through air; 

fomites; third person. 

(f) Disinfection; Same as for small-pox. 

(g) Prophylaxis : Same as for small-pox. 

Mumps (epidemic parotitis). 

(a) Cause: Unknown. 

(b) Localized : One or both parotid glands. 

(c) Entry: Probably mouth. 

(d) Exit: Supposedly, in saliva. 

(e) Disinfection and Prophylaxis: Only sputum 

need be disinfected; however, because in 
the army the efficiency is severely taxed by 
the orchitis which so commonly occurs 
with mumps in adults, isolation and dis- 
infection as for other contagious diseases 
should be practised. 

Pneumonia (Lobar pneumonia). 

(a) Cause: Diplococcus pneumonic^ (pneumococcus, 

micrococcus lanceolatus) ; is non-sporogen- 
ous. 

(b) Localization: Lungs; by extension, in blood, 

pleural cavity and pericardium. 



mCRO-ORGANISMS IN VARIOUS DISEASES. -201 

(c) Entry : Respiratory channels ; normally ipresent in 

almost everyone's moutb. 

(d) Exit: Sputum; in discharges when empyema 

(secondary to pneumonia) ruptures, or 
is opened by operation; in complications, 
otitis media, etc. 

(e) Contracted : Exposure to cold and wet ; exposure 

to pneumonia while fatigued and depressed. 

(f) Disinfection: Easily destroyed by boiling; car- 

bolic acid 3-5 per cent, formalin 3-5 
per cent, tricresol i per cent. Sulphur or 
formaldehyde fumigation. 

(g) Prophylaxis: January, February, and March, 

are the coldest and most disagreable months 
in the year and are on this account the 
months in which the greatest number of 
cases of pneumonia occur. Avoid wetting 
and exposure, and especially after "catch- 
ing cold. ' ' Intoxicated persons are partic - 
ularly susceptible to pneumonia, as are 
also infants, old people, and those debili- 
tated by a chronic disease. Mental de- 
pression is also a predisposing cause. 

Relapsing Fever ("Famine fever," seven-day fever, 
etc.). 

(a) Cause : Spirochata Obermeieri. 

(b) Localization: Blood. 



202 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

(c) Entry: Not known, probably through bite of 

insect, e.g., bed-bug. 

(d) Exit: Probably through bite of suctorial insect. 

(e) Contracted : Seems to be contagious ; but as only 

seen where over-crowding, and where 
hygienic conditions are bad, probably 
conveyed by insect. 

(f ) Disinfection : Nothing known of the micro-organ- 

ism outside of the body. 

(g) Prophylaxis: Plenty of fresh air, good food, 

and personal cleanliness, are probably the 
best means of avoiding the infection. 
Screen houses against mosquitoes, flies, 
etc., and wage war against all vermin such 
as bed-bugs, roaches, etc. 

Rubella (Rotheln, German measles). 

(a) Cause: Not known. 

(b) Localization: Blood, skin, respiratory tract. 

(c) Entry: Probably through respiratory tract. 

(d) Exit : Respiratory tract and probably emanations 

from skin. 

(e) Contracted: Resembles measles (which see) . 

Scarlet Fever. 

(a) Cause: Not known. 

(b) Localized : Throat ; blood ; skin ; in complicating 

suppurations, e.g., ear. 

(c) Entry: Respiratory tract; also wounds. 



I 



MICRO-ORGANISMS IN VARIOUS DISEASES. 203 

(d) Exit: Sputum; nasal secretions; skin, before 

and during exfoliation; suppurations dur- 
ing and foUowing the disease. 

(e) Contracted: Contact with the disease, or with 

persons and objects which have been in 
contact with same; from milk handled by 
persons sick or convalescent from scarlatina; 
from individuals with suppurations con- 
sequent upon an attack, e.g., otitis media 
(middle-ear disease). 

(f) Disinfection: Virus has unusual vitality; disin- 

fect same as for small-pox or diphtheria. 

(g) Prophylaxis : Quarantine should not be less than 

forty days after the completion of desqua- 
mation, and it might even be continued 
longer; air-passages should be treated 
antiseptically during whole period of 
quarantine. Discharging ear is infectious, 
and children with such a discharge have 
been known to transmit the disease in this 
way. Sun and air room some weeks 
after case. Most rigid quarantine and 
disinfection must be practised to prevent 
contagion. 

Small-poz (variola). 

(a) Cause: Not known. 

(b) Localization : Skin, conjxmctivae, mouth, cesopha- 



204 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

gus, rectum, and probably blood ; is general 
infection. 

(c) Entry: Probably through respiratory tract; 

may also enter through abrasions, as the 
former practice of variolation proves. 

(d) Exit: Exhalations from lungs and skin, partic- 

ularly in the dried scales of the latter; 
in all secretions and excretions, therefore 
in sputum, urine, feces, tears, pustules, etc. 

(e) Contracted: Highly contagious; virus is in air 

surrounding patient, being thrown oflF with 
breath and wafted from eruption; is con- 
veyed by persons and f omites ; may also be 
conveyed by flies . 

(f) Disinfection: Disinfect everything which has 

been in contact with patient; also en- 
tire room and contents. Screen windows 
from flies, and kill all vermin; wipe all 
surfaces of room daily with bichloride 
of mercury (i-iooo); linens, etc., boil, 
steam, or immerse in tricresol (2 per cent), 
formalin (5 per cent), carbolic acid (5 per 
cent) ; anoint patient with carbolated vase- 
lin; all abscesses and ulcers should be 
regarded as infectious until healed; fumi- 
gate after recovery with sulphur or for- 
maldehyde. 

(g) Prophylaxis: Vaccination of every one during 



MICRO-ORGANISMS IN VARIOUS DISEASES. 205 

an epidemic, whether previously vaccinated 
or not; isolation of sick, and disinfection 
of patient and room after recovery. 

Epidemic Stomatitis (aphthous fever, foot and mouth 
disease); is disease of cattle, sheep, and pigs, which 
is often transmitted to man. 

(a) Cause: Unknown. 

(b) Localization: Mucous membrane of mouth and 

lips; also in wounds; in cattle also on tits 
and udder. 

(c) Entry: Mouth through milk, and wounds of 

hands, arm, and fore-arm from infected 
animal. 

(d) Exit : From secretions of mouth, and ulcers of the 

disease. 

(e) Contracted: Contracted from pustules of sick 

animal, or from milk, butter and cheese. 

(f) Disinfection: Disinfect secretions from mouth, 

also discharges from the lesions of the 
disease, bandages, linens, etc., in the usual 
strengths of the solutions given for other 
diseases. 

(g) Prophylaxis : Where epidemic in cattle, boil all 

milk, and isolate all sick cattle; also indi- 
viduals who take care of them ; butter and 
cheese made from milk of infected animals 
can also convey the disease. 



2o6 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

Syphilis (Lues). 

(a) Cause: Spirochceta paUidcB {?). 

(b) Localization: Practically everywhere in second 

and third stages; in first stage (primary) 
the initial lesion (chancer) is usually 
upon the genitals; extra-genital chancers, 
however, may be found upon any cutan- 
eous surface; also upon lips, tongue, ton- 
sils, eye-lids, or rectum. 

(c) Entry: Through abrasions of skin or mucous 

membrane ; through spermatozoan ; through 
oyum; placenta. 

(d) Exit: From discharging lesions, and with blood 

when drawn. 

(e) Contracted: Usually through illicit intercourse, 

when primary lesion is found upon gen- 
ital organs ; may be innocently contracted 
through kissing, from infected handker- 
chiefs, pipes, dishes, etc.; by pricking 
finger during operation upon a syphilitic, 
or through examination during confine- 
ment. When innocently contracted is 
called syphilis insontium to distinguish 
it from venereal syphilis, which carries 
with it an implied stigma. 

(f ) Disinfection : Boiling water or steam ; usual chem- 

ical disinfectants. 

(g) Prophylaxis: Abstinence from irregular relations; 



MICRO-ORGANISMS IN VARIOUS DISEASES. 207 

ph3rsicians should impress upon all syphil- 
itics the danger to others of contracting 
the disease from discharges from both the 
primary (chancer) and secondary (mucous 
patcheSj ulcers, particularly of throat) 
lesions. 

Tetanus (Lock-jaw). 

(a) Cause: BacUlus tetani; forms spores. 

(b) Localized : Subcutaneous or sub-mucous tissues ; 

usually former; umbilical cord of new- 
bom. 

(c) Entry : Wounds, often of trifling nature ; also in 

woimds where much tearing of tissue 
has occurred, especially if soiled with 
earth ; compoimd fractures. 

(d) Exit: In discharges from wound only. 

(e) Contracted: Gim-shot or cannon-cracker wounds; 

contusions in which powder, earth or other 
foreign bodies driven into tissues; punc- 
tured wounds of hands or feet, e.g., by 
nail. 

(f) Disinfection: As forms spores, prolonged boiling 

or contact with powerful disinfectants 
necessary, tricresol or l3rsol 2 per cent solu- 
tion, two hours; bichloride of mercury 
1-500, two hours. Use solutions hot. 
Only discharges from woimd, and soiled 



2o8 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

dressings, need be disinfected. See an- 
thrax (p. 185). 
(g) Prophylaxis: Consists in thorough oj>ening and 
cleansing of all wounds which have been 
soiled with earth, or resulted from Fourth 
of July celebrations; or in which foreign 
body is imbedded in flesh. Where tet- 
anus is feared, the wound should not be 
sealed with dressings, but left exposed to 
the air ; tetanus antitoxin shotdd be used. 

Tuberculosis. 

(a) Cause: Bacillus tuberculosis (Koch bacillus); 

non-sporogenous, but exhibits greater resist- 
ance to destructive agencies than vegetathe 
forms of other bacteria. 

(b) Localized : Practically everywhere ; lungs (phthi- 

sis, consumption) ; l)miph glands (scrofula) ; 
bones, abdominal viscera; brain, etc. 

(c) Entry: Chiefly by air-passages, and by mouth 

with food and drink; also through woimd 
of skin and mucous membranes. 

(d) Exit: In all discharges from diseased tissues or 

organs. As lungs most frequently are 
the seat of the disease, the sputum is the 
most common vehicle of discharge. 

(e) Contracted: Usually by inhalation where pro- 

longed contact with consumptive ; probable 



MICRO-ORGANISMS IN VARIOUS DISEASES. 209 

that infants occasionally contract the dis- 
ease by drinking milk from tuberculous 
cows. 

(f) Disinfection: Boil infected material in closed 

vessel ten minutes or longer; well to bum 
objects of no value. For sputum, formalin 
15-20 per cent, tricresol 2 per cent, l3rsol 
2 per cent are recommended; mix these 
thorougly with sputimi and let stand one 
hour. Fumigate with sulphur or formal- 
dehyde. 

(g) Prophylaxis: Chief danger is from carelessness 

of the consumptive in disposal of sputum; 
if careful disinfection of expectoration 
and all things soiled during the act of sneez- 
ing, coughing, etc., is practised, he is no 
menace to others. Those immediately 
surrounding the consumptive most often 
fall victims, a fact better established than 
heredity in this disease. Neither milk 
nor meat from tuberculous cattle should 
be used. Consumptives should refrain 
from kissing others ; nor should they marry. 
Typhoid Fever. 

(a) Cause: Bacillus typhosus; is non-sporogenous. 

(b) Localization: Primarily in intestinal tract or 

lungs; in blood; bladder; in complicating 

suppurations. 
14 



2IO INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

(c) Entry: By mouth, through water principally; 

less often in ice, milk, and other foods; in 
some localities oysters are especially dan- 
gerous when eaten raw. 

(d) Exit: Discharges from bowels; urine; sputum; 

suppurative complications; skin; in rose- 
spots; sometimes in vomit. 

(e) Contracted : The specific bacillus must get into 

the mouth and be swallowed; great care 
must be exercised by those in attendance 
upon typhoid fever patients not to contam- 
inate their foods, or the foods of others. 

(f) Disinfection: The bacillus is killed inmiediately 

by boiling water or steam; disinfect the 
sputum, the stools, discharges from the 
bowels, urine, linens, eating-utensils, etc., 
by boiling, or by 5 per cent carbolic acid, 
5 per cent formalin, 2 per cent tricresol, 
and let stand one hour; bichloride of mer- 
cury (i-iooo) may be used to disinfect the 
urine. When convalescence established, 
wash out bladder once daily for several 
days with bichloride of mercury (1-20,- 
000), or give urotropin 30 to 60 gr. 
daily for the same length of time; all dis- 
charges should be received in vessels con- 
taining a small quantity of one of the dis- 
infecting solutions, after which the balance 



MICRO-ORGANISMS IN VARIOUS DISEASES. 211 

is added in sufficient quantity to make up 
the strength recommended, 
(g) Prophylaxis : Wherever human excrement is used 
as fertilizer, eat nothing raw; boil all 
water whether used for drinking purposes 
or for dish-washing, unless the water- 
supply is above suspicion; boil the milk 
and water whenever typhoid prevails, and 
use no ice in water for drinking purposes; 
screen house against flies. 
The essential thing in prophylaxis in typhoid fever, 
in fact, in all communicable diseases, is to see to 
thorough disinfection of all infectious discharges in the 
sick-room. If the latter were done, epidemics of com- 
municable diseases could easily be controlled. The fol- 
lowing directions, as given by Prof. Osier, are the pre- 
cautions followed in the Johns Hopkins Hospital to 
guard against the spread of typhoid fever: "Dishes 
must be isolated, washed, and dried separately, and 
boiled daily. Thermometers must be isolated, kept 
in bichloride of mercury (i-iooo), which must be re- 
newed daily. Linen, when soiled, must be soaked in 
carbolic acid (1-20), for two hours before sending to 
the laundry. Stools must be thoroughly mixed with 
an equal amount of milk of lime, and allowed to stand 
one hour. Urine must be mixed with an equal amount 
of carbolic (1-20), and allowed to stand one hour. Bed- 
pans and urinals must be isolated and scalded after 



212 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

each time of using. Syringes and rectal tubes must be 
isolated and the latter boiled after using. Tubs should 
be scrubbed daily and soaked in carbolic as the linen 
is. Hands must be scrubbed and disinfected after giv- 
ing tubs or working over typhoid fever patients. 
Blankets, mattresses, and pillows must be sterilized 
after use, in the steam sterilizer." 

Whooping-cough (Pertussis). 

(a) Cause: Unknown. 

(b) Localization: Respiratory tract. 

(c) Entry: Nose and mouth through air. 

(d) Exit: Secretions from nose and mouth. 

(e) Contracted : From the sick, or from room, hand- 

kerchief, etc., infected by same. 

(f) Disinfection: As cause not known, no data. 

However, boiling water or steam, and the 
usual strengths of the chemical disinfec- 
tants are recommended. Fumigate with 
sulphur or formaldehyde. 

Yellow Fever. 

(a) Cause : Not known ; mosquito (stegomyia fascicUa) 

known to carry the virus. 

(b) Localization: Blood. 

(c) Entry: Bites of stegomyia mosquitoes. 

(d) Exit : Through bites of mosquitoes. 

(e) Contracted : Only by being bitten by infected mos- 

quitoes. 



MICRO-ORGANISMS IN VARIOUS DISEASES. 213 

(f ) Disinfection : Only necessary to destroy all mos- 

quitoes in sick-room and house. Sulphur 
or p5rretlirum two poimds to every one thou- 
sand cubic feet of space, exposure two 
hoiirs. 

(g) Prophylaxis: Protect sick from bites of mos- 

quitoes; screen houses, use mosquito nets, 
and destroy mosquitoes in house by burn- 
ing sulphur or p5rrethrum; in yellow fever 
zones, the breeding places of mosquitoes 
should be removed or drained; persons 
while out, should protect themselves from 
bites. 



CHAPTER IX. 
DISINFECTION AND DISINFECTANTS.* 

The purpose of disinfection is to prevent the spread 
of the communicable diseases. In its application it 
aims at the destruction of those minute forms of animal 
and vegetable life which prey upon both man and 
animals and cause disease. The discovery of the rela- 
tionship between living pathogenic agents and disease; 
of the manner in which these same agents enter and 
leave the body; and the subsequent determination of 
reliable methods of destroying them, marked a new 
epoch in the history of medicine in so far that disinfec- 
tion was for the first time placed upon a secure founda- 
tion. As a result, before the unseen terrors of the air 
and water we no longer wring our hands in abject and 
helpless misery while thousands of our fellow-beings 
are smitten by disease! Nor do we inhumanly flee 
from those afflicted, leaving them not only to the mercy 
of a cruel sickness, but also to those beasts among 

*For most of the data in this chapter and much in the preceding, the 
author has drawn freely upon Dr. Rosenau's ** Disinfection and Disin- 
fectants," an incomparable book on the subject; to a lesser extent upon 
Dr. Sternberg's "Lomb Prize Essay." To both authors he gratefully 
acknowledges his indebtedness. 

214 



DISINFECTION AND DISINFECTANTS. 215 

humanity who see in calamities only opportunity for 
license and profit!* But with a courage bom of 
knowledge, and with the consciousness of power which 
the former inspires, we fight a scourge as we would a 
ruthless foe. 

The weapons used against infectious diseases are 
disinfectants and insecticides, weapons which in our 
own generation have made in civilized communities 
"plagues" impossible. Indeed, were it not for the 
indifference displayed by the public towards sanitary 
science in not providing its health officers with ample 
resources and authority, many prevailing infectious 
diseases, such as tuberculosis, typhoid fever, etc., would 
be far less common, and would year by year claim fewer 
victims, until they too would in time come to be spoken 
of as belonging to the horrors of another age. 

Often, in omitting the enforcement of sanitary 
measures, physicians and nurses seem callous to the 
public weal, a negligence due no doubt to lack of 
encouragement from the patient's family. Yet who 
are in better positions to dam at their source the springs 
of disease ? In every infection the patient is an incuba- 
tor, as it were, for pathogenic microbes, which leave 
his body by definite channels in the excretions and 
secretions. If these discharges are not immediately 
made innocuous, there is the probability that the infec- 
tion will be spread. The task of disinfecting any 

*See Walter Reed and Yellow Fever, by H. A. Kelly. 



2i6 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

dangerous discharge at the bed-side is compaxativdy 
easy, and one which is properly a duty that the phys- 
ician should direct, and which the nurse or family should 
perform ; and were this duty, which is one to humanity, 
always conscientiously discharged, foods and drinks 
would not be polluted in the manner described in pre- 
vious pages. 

The importance of careful disinfection in the sick- 
room of all infectious secretions and excretions, of bed- 
linen, towels, eating-utensils, flat surfaces, etc., is 
quite well understood by the public generally, and is 
treated at length in text-books familiar to both phys- 
icians and nurses. Nor do the descriptions of the 
various disinfectants and their use differ so greatly as to 
require special mention. The following brief outline 
is intended solely to call attention to the most eflScient 
disinfectants, and to the strengths of the chemical 
disinfecting solutions commonly employed. 

Heat, as has been stated elsewhere, is the 
Heat. most reliable disinfectant known. Burn- 
ing, or heating objects to incandescence, 
renders them sterile. However, this kind of disinfec- 
tion, it is obvious, is seldom practicable, and we must 
fall back upon lower temperatures. Either dry or 
moist heat is then available. Other things equal, moist 
heat is a far more efficient destroyer of germ life than 
dry heat, because it has greater powers of penetration. 
Boiling tubercle bacilli in water (212° F., 100° C.) for ten 



DISINFECTION AND DISINFECTANTS. 217 

minutes kills them, whereas they can resist a dry heat 
of 2 1 2^ F. for several hours. More efficient than boiling 
is live steam, especially if it is used under a pressure of 
from one to three atmospheres. Special apparatuses 
called autO'ClaveSj are used for this purpose, and all 
important sanitary stations possess such an equip- 
ment. 

The advantages of using an apparatus in which steam 
under pressure can be employed are three-fold : (i) The 
penetrating power of the steam is increased; (2) since 
the temperature of steam rises with the pressure, its 
germicidal power is accordingly enhanced ; (3) on account 
of the higher temperature and greater penetration, the 
time required for disinfection is greatly diminished. 
As a matter of fact, the bulkiness of some articles, such 
as mattresses, bales of rags, etc., practically precludes 
disinfection without the use of auto-claves or especially 
devised disinfecting chambers. 

Besides steam, formaldehyde alone, or in combination 
with steam, is used under pressure for disinfection. 
Applied together in this way the two are more quickly 
germicidal than either gas used alone. 

Bacteria differ in regard to the temperature required 
to kill them. Almost all the vegetative forms are killed 
at a temperature of (60^ C, 140^ F.) if applied for ten 
minutes, and boiling (100^ C, 212^ F.)destro3rs the same 
at once. An exception to this rule, as we have else- 
where pointed out, is the tubercle bacillus, which. 



r 



3i8 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

although only occurring in a vegetative form, can with- 
stand the temperature of boiling water (212° F., 100° C.) 
for ten minutes. In practical work, boiling, where 
possible, is resorted to for all vegetative formsof bacteria, 
the length of time depending upon the mass of material 
to be disinfected. 

Spores of bacteria are quite difficult to kill. Where 
the apparatus is at hand, steam under a pressure of 
from twenty to twenty-five pounds (temperature 230° F., 
105° C. — 240° F., 115.5° C.) is used. If steam under 
pressure is not available, boiling for an hour in a closed 




Fig. »6.— The Pot Method ot Burning Sulptmr. (Rosenau.) 

vessel is a safe rule. Fortunately, none of the epidemic 
diseases is caused by a spore-forming microbe, a fact 
which lightens greatly the burden and responsibility 
imposed upon the disinfector. 

Two gaseous disinfectants are in common 
use throughout the world, formaldehyde 
and sulphur dioxide. Of these, formal- 
dehyde approaches more nearly our concep- 
tion of an ideal disinfectant than does sulphur dioxide 



Gaseous 

DiSINFEC- 



DISINFECTION AND DISINFECTANTS. 219 

or any other. Compared with sulphur dioxide, formal- 
dehyde has these distinct advantages, namely, it is non- 
poisonous, is a true deodorant, and does not attack 
metals, colors, or fabrics. On the other hand, it does 
not destroy vermin, as does sulphur, a disadvantage 
that is disappointing in the light of what recent investi- 
gations have taught us of the highly important part 
which various insects play in the conveyance of disease. 
To obtain the best results with both formaldehyde and 
sulphur requires a full knowledge of the conditions 
under which they are generated, of the apparatuses used 
in disinfection, and of such concomitant arrangements 
of rooms, buildings, conditions of temperature and 
moisture, etc., as are necessary. It is not the intent of 
this chapter, however, to enter into the subject of 
disinfection so extensively as such a description would 
entail. 

Liquid disinfectants are unequivocally 

Chemical superior to gaseous ones if direct contact 

by washing, immersion, or mixing, of the 

Giquid). disinfectant and infectious matter can be 

accomplished. Gases cannot be depended 
on for more than surface disinfection, a fact which 
restricts their use to the inaccessible parts of rooms, 
buildings, ships, etc., and to works of art, e.g., paintings, 
and fiaie fabrics. 

The resistance of infectious agents to chemical dis- 
infectants is subject to the same variations as their 



220 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

resistance to heat. Such vegetative forms of bacteria as 
are more resistant to heat, are more resistant to chem- 
icals; and the sporulating forms are even more difficult 
to kill with chemicals than with steam under pressure. 
Chemical disinfectants vary greatly in the strength of 
each required to be efficient, and their disinfecting 
powers also vary with the material to be disinfected. 
Very powerful disinfectants may fail to act on account 
of chemical union taking place between them and the 
material in which the infectious agents are contained. 
Thus both bichloride of mercury and carbolic acid 
lose much of their disinfecting qualities when added to 
albuminous material, on accoimt of the formation of an 
insoluble albuminate which is inert. Furthermore, if 
one of these substances be used in excess in the belief 
that the above defect may be overcome, the end is 
just as likely not to be realized, because this insoluble 
combination surrounds the infectious agents and pre- 
vents contact between them and the disinfectants. 
In instances of this kind either the chloride of lime, the 
cresols, or formalin are to be preferred. Where the 
medium contains much organic matter or filth, even 
where the proper disinfectant is used, much stronger 
solutions than commonly employed are advisable. An 
extremely valuable point to remember in applying any 
of the chemical disinfectants is that the disinfecting 
power of all of them is greatly enhanced if they are 
heated with the material to be disinfected; and the 



DISINFECTION AND DISINFECTANTS. 221 

higher the temperature, the more is their disinfecting 
power increased. In this way substances of feeble dis- 
infecting powers may often be used to advantage. The 
value of heating a disinfectant is well illustrated by com- 
paring the action of carbolic acid upon the anthrax bacil- 
lus and its spores. Anthrax bacilli are killed in ten sec- 
onds by a one per cent solution of carbolic acid, yet its 
spores can live a month in a five per cent solution. But 
if the temperature of a five per cent solution of the same 
acid is raised to 75^ C. (134.6° F.), they are killed in 
three minutes. In all disinfection, therefore, hot solu- 
tions should be used. 

DISmFECTING SOLUTIONS. 

Perhaps the commonest disinfectant used 
BicHLORmE is bichloride of mercury (corrosive subli- 
OF Mercury, mate). It is a powerful germicide, even in 

weak solutions. It has several serious 
drawbacks, however, which limit its usefulness ; among 
these is the fact that it is a corrosive poison; that its 
solutions attack practically every metal; and that it 
unites with albuminous matter. For the last reason it is 
not to be used as a disinfectant for the disinfection of 
sputum, feces, and discharges containing albumin, 
such as pus. For washing floors, walls, and other sur- 
faces, a hot solution (i-iooo) is as efficient as any other 
disinfectant. For ordinary purposes the i-iooo solu- 
tion is the strength employed. This can be prepared 



222 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

from the tablets when a small quantity is desired, or in 
larger quantity by taking 

Bichloride grs. 6i J. 

Citric acid or common salt grs. 6i^. 

Water gallon i. 

The i-iooo solution is ample for the destruction of all 
non-spore-bearing bacteria at ordinary temperatures 
in one-half hour. For spores, stronger solutions (1-500), 
and a longer exposure (one hour), are advisable. As a 
disinfectant for the hands in surgical work, and as a 
moist dressing in various inflammatory conditions, this 
solution of mercury is in constant use. 

Formalin is used as a disinfectant in a 4 to 
FoRMALm. 5 per cent solution of the 40 per cent solu- 
tion of the gas in water. Its advantages as 
a disinfectant are many; it does not injure most fabrics; 
it attacks only two metals, iron and steel, and these 
only when hot. It is non-poisonous, and albuminous 
matter does not interfere with its action. It kills spores. 
It is a true and efficient deodorant. Urine, feces, 
sputum, and all albuminous discharges, are quickly 
disinfected and deodorized by it. 

Carbolic acid is a useful disinfectant and 
Carbolic is with reason widely used. A 3 to 5 per 
Acm (phenol), cent solution (the latter 1-20) is the 

strength employed. Since it does not 
kill spores, it should not be used after anthrax, tetanus, 



DISINFECTION AND DISINFECTANTS. ^23 

malignant oedema, and other diseases due to bacteria 
which produce spores. Although it coagulates albu- 
minous matter, it is not so active in this respect as bi- 
chloride of mercury, and can therefore be used for the 
disinfection of soiled linens, clothing, and also for 
excreta. It is well to remember that carbolic acid is a 
powerful corrosive poison. For liquid discharges in 
cholera, typhoid, d3rsentery, etc., a 5 per cent solution 
may be used, when twice the amount of carbolic to 
material is advised. The mixture should be allowed 
to stand four hours. 

A convenient method of preparing a five per cent 
solution (1-20) is as follows: 

Carbolic acid (95 per cent) ozs. 6^ 

Water gallon i 

Agitate until the acid is thoroughly dissolved in the water. 

The cresols are among the most powerful 
and valuable disinfectants known. None 
of them are as poisonous as carbolic acid (phenol), 
nor are they open to the objection that albumin- 
ous material interferes with their action. They all 
kill spores. Tricresol may be used in i per cent solu- 
tion for the disinfection of infected discharges of all 
kinds. The other preparations of the cresols, solutoly 
solveol, lysol, as compared to tricresol, have a reputation 
for disinfecting power in the order in which they are 
named. 



224 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

Lime (quicklime), as such, is useful for the 
disinfection of cadavers dead of infectious 
diseases. For this purpose twice the weight of the 
body in xmslaked lime is packed about the cadaver, 
which should be contained in a tight cofl&n. Neither 
water or moisture need be added. 

Which is prepared from the slaked lime 
Milk of (hydrate of lime, calcium hydrate) by add- 
LiME. ing one part by weight of hydrate of lime to 
eight parts of water, is a valuable disin- 
fectant for excreta. 

The slaked lime used in the preparation should 
always be freshly made by mixing one pint of water to 
two poxmds of lime. For the disinfection of stools, 
an amount of milk of lime equal to the material to be 
disinfected should be used, and the mixture be allowed 
to stand two hours. Whitewash is slaked lime mixed 
with water to the consistency of a thick cream. It is a 
valuable means of disinfecting the walls and ceiling of 
stables, cellars, and other rough structures. 

Chlorinated lime is best adapted for the 
"Cm^oRiDE disinfection of excreta and sputum. It is 
OF Lime." both deodorant and disinfectant. For dis- 
infecting purposes dissolve eight ounces of 
the chloride of lime in a gallon of water (Sternberg). 
This solution should be placed in the vessel before it 
receives the discharge. From one to two quarts are 
used in the case of cholera or t)rphoid stools. After 



DISINFECTION AND DISINFECTANTS. 225 

thorough agitation, the mixture is allowed to stand 
from one-half to one hour. For sputum, an amount 
equal to the volume of the sputum should be added, or 
the sputum cup should be filled about one-half with the 
solution before use. Chlorinated lime cannot be used 
for the disinfection of fabrics or colored goods, since it 
bleaches and attacks the fabric directly. The chlorin- 
ated lime used in the preparation of disinfecting solu- 
tions must have been contained in an air-tight receptacle, 
otherwise from exposure to the air much of its disin- 
fecting powers are lost. It has about the same germi- 
cidal value as milk of lime. 



15 



CHAPTER X. 

THE COLLECTION AND EXAMINATION OF 
SECRETIONS AND EXCRETIONS. 

This chapter in introduced as an aid in the exami- 
nation and collection of specimens of the various excre- 
tions, in preserving them from deterioration, and in 
describing them in simple terms according to profes- 
sional custom. Attention is directed only to such points 
as may be of value either to the observer, or to another 
by whom the specimens are to be examined and their 
significance interpreted. 

From many standpoints, the sputum, in 
Sputum, disease, possesses very great importance. 

Its bulk is made up of pathological secre- 
tions, abnormal cellular elements, occasionally tissues 
and rarely stones, all of which are of great diagnostic 
significance ; at the same time, it is the vehicle in which 
the pathogenic agents of many diseases, both local and 
general, make their exit from the body. From a mere 
visual examination, the trained observer can detect 
the presence of features characteristic of certain dis- 
eases, and abnormal ingredients that are suggestive of 
disorders of certain organs; whik with the microscope 

226 



SECRETIONS AND EXCRETIONS. 227 

he can observe the presence of bacteria, animal para- 
sites or their eggs, and the various other constituents 
invisible to the unaided eye. 

Attention should always be given to the 
Amount, amount of sputum expectorated in the 

twenty-four hours, since only in this way 
can an increase or decrease be definitely determined. 
A daily record should be kept of the quantity, other- 
wise in the rush of other work valuable information 
may be lost. Especially important is a knowledge of the 
amount of expectoration in case of haemorrhage, or of a 
sudden large increase, as may occur when an hepatic 
abscess ruptures into the lungs. The twenty-four 
hours' quantity should be measured for the reason that 
many patients (e.g., pulmonary tuberculosis, bron- 
chiestasis) expectorate chiefly only during one or two 
hours in the twenty-four, so that if the amount expelled 
at this time is not taken into account, a report of a scanty 
expectoration might be made. 

Consistence of a sputum is another charac- 
CoNsisTENCE. tcrfstic of importance; it may be thin and 

watery (serous), or so heavy and tenacious 
that the vessel may be inverted without spilling its con- 
tents (mucoid). Mucoid sputum is seen most charac- 
teristically during the stationary period of pneumonia. 
Between these two extremes there may be various de- 
grees of consistency, or the sputum may consist of both 
elements distinctly discernible (muco-serous). Thus, 



228 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

in pulmonary tuberculosis, when the sputum-cup has 
stood awhile, the contents are seen to consist of an upper 
watery layer, and a lower tenacious mass which, when 
shaken, is seen to be made up of round, coin-like partic- 
les. This is the so-called mummidar sputum which is 
characteristic of the second and third stages of consimip- 
tion. 

Worth remembering also is the fact that on standing 
twenty-four hours or longer in a warm room, a tenacious 
sputum may become liquefied through solution of its 
mucus by ferments. 

Much valuable information may be derived 
Color, from the color of a sputum. Sputum may 

vary from the clear glairy appearance of 
normal saliva, to grey, yellow, green, red, brown, and 
even black. A greenish or yellow color indicates either 
pus (purulent), or bile (bilious) ; a red color, blood (san- 
guineous); a brown or chocolate color, liver abscess; 
and black, carbon, a condition resulting from the inhala- 
tion of carbon particles as is practised by smokers for 
pleasure or by miners from necessity. 

If there is anything unusual to the odor of a 
Odor. sputum, it should be noted. Most sputa 

are practically odorless. However, under 
certain circumstances, e.g., putrid bronchitis, the other 
extreme is presented, and the offensiveness of the 
expectoration beggars description. In pulmonary tu- 
berculosis the sputum has a sweetish odor. 



SECRETIONS AND EXCRETIONS. 229 

In describing a sputum a single predomi- 
nating characteristic is selected. Thus as 

Description ^ i. xi. -j xi. i i. 

o types we have the mucoid, the purulent, 

OF A Sputum. ^^ . 

the serous, and the sanguineous. Where 
two or more elements are plainly mingled, 
such terms as muco-purulent, muco-serous, sero-san- 
guineous, and sanguino-mucopurulent, are used to de- 
scribe it. 

Sputum is most frequently examined for the tubercle 
baciUus, and where it is to be submitted to an expert 
with this object in view, the following directions should 
be observed : " Collect the sputum in a clean one or two- 
ounce bottle with a wide mouth and a water-tight stop- 
per. The bottle should be labeled with the name of the 
patient. The sputum coughed up in the early morn- 
ing is to be preferred. If the expectoration be scanty, 
the entire amount coughed up in the twenty-four hours 
should be collected. Care should be taken that the con- 
tents of the stomach, food, etc., are not ejected during 
the act of coughing, and collected instead of pulmonary 
sputum. Purulent, cheesy, and muco-purulent sputa 
most frequently contain tubercle bacilli; pure mucus, 
blood, or saliva do not as a rule contain them. When 
haemorrhage has occurred, if possible some purulent, 
cheesy, or muco-purulent sputum should be collected 
for examination. The sputum should be forwarded in 
as fresh a condition as possible." 



230 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

In suspected diphtheria, for the purpose 
Diphtheritic of diagnosis, and after recovery from diph- 
CuLTUREs. theria, before raising the quaxantine, to 

determine the presence or absence of the 
specific bacillus, it is compulsory in many cities that a 
specimen be taken from the patient's throat and sent to 
the municipal laboratory for examination. For this pur- 
pose a special outfit is furnished consisting of two glass 
tubes, one, containing a sterile swab, the other, a cream 
or chocolate colored jelly which fills about one-third of 
the tube. The material in the second tube is blood- 
serum which has been solidified in a slanting position 
by heat. To make a culture, the swab is first smeared 
over the affected area in the throat, and then immediately 
applied to the slanting surface of the blood-senim. The 
tubes are then returned to the laboratory where the one 
containing the blood-serum is placed in a warm oven 
(37.5° C. — 98.6° F.) for from twelve to eighteen hours. 
A stained preparation of the bacteria, which by this 
time have developed upon the blood-serum, is now ex- 
amined with a microscope, and the presence or absence 
of diphtheria !^bacilli determined. The following di- 
rections, taken from the literature of the Philadelphia 
Health Department, is an illustration of the instruc- 
tions which accompany the tubes: 

DIRECTIONS FOR MAKING CULTURES. 
"The patient should be placed in a good light, and, 
if a child, properly held. In cases where it is possible 



SECRETIONS AND EXCRETIONS. 231 

to get a good view of the throat, depress the tongue and 
rub the cotton swab gently, but freely, against any 
visible exudate, revolving the wire between the fingers, 
so as to bring all portions of the swab in contact with the 
mucous membrane or exudate. In other cases, includ- 
ing those in which the exudate is confined to the larjnix, 
pass the swab as far back as possible, avoiding the 
tongue, and rub it freely as described above against the 
mucous membrane of the pharynx and tonsils. With- 




FiG. 27. — ^Method of inoculating culture media. (Williams.) 

draw the cotton plug from the culture tube, holding 
it so that the portion withdrawn from the tube does not 
come in contact with the fingers or with any other 
substance. Insert the swab and rub it gently but 
thoroughly back and forth over the entire surface of 
the blood-serum. Do not allow the swab to touch 
anything except the throat of the patient and the sur- 
face of the serum. Do not push the swab into the 
serum, nor break the surface in any way. Do not use 



232 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 



tubes m which the serum is contaminated, is liquefied 
or is dried up. Then replace the swab in its own tube, 
plug both tubes, mark the cultiure tube with the name 
of the patient for identification, and return both tubes 
to the laboratory. Unsatisfactory cultures usually 
result from failure to follow carefully q 
the above directions." Caution: In 
making cultures, to insure a successful 
result, no antiseptic must have been 
used in the patient's throat for an hour 
preceding the taking of the culture. 

In croup, a membrane is often 
coughed up, which it is sometimes de- 
sirable to have examined to determine 
the nature of the infection, i.e., whether 
diphtheria is present or not; in such 
cases it is especially important that the 
specimen be not placed in any preserv- 
ing fluid or disinfectant, since such 
solutions destroy the very agents which 
it is aimed to find. 

Vomiting is a feature in fig. 28.— Needles 

,, 1 1 T e .^ . ^^sed for inoculating 

VOMIT. local diseases of the stom- media, 
ach ; in affections of neigh- 
boring organs (heart, liver) ; it also occurs at the onset 
and during the progress of the infectious diseases. 
The points to be observed in vomiting are the time, color, 
odor, quantity, and ingredients. 



SECRETIONS AND EXCRETIONS. 233 

The time of vomiting is important, espe- 
TniE. dally in relation to meals. It should be 
noticed whether vomiting immediately fol- 
lows the ingestion of food, or is delayed some minutes 
or hours; also whether it apparently results from the 
ingestion of some particular article of diet. Vomiting 
may be frequent, as in the early months of pregnancy, 
or it may be sporadic, as in dilatation of the stomach. 
Sudden, unexpected, vomiting practically always marks 
the onset of the eruptive fevers in children. 

Color is given to the vomit either by the 
Color. foods ingested, or by foreign or patho- 
logical constituents such as bile, blood, 
mucus, etc. 

As a rule the vomit is green or golden in 
Bile. color from admixture with bile, a secre- 
tion which is always present in intense or 
continuous vomiting. 

Red vomit usually results from admixture 
Blood, with blood. If the blood has not been 
acted upon by the digestive juices, it is 
easily recognized ; but the gastric ferments may so alter 
its appearance that the vomit may vary from a deep- 
red to a coflFee or black color. Black vomit, it will be 
remembered, is a characteristic s)nnptom in yellow 
fever. Vomit may also be dark from the presence of 
stercoraceous material (feces). Care should alwa3rs 
be taken not to mistake food for evidence of pathological 



234 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

vomit. The writer was once sent the red vomit of a 
pregnant woman for examination, haemorrhage being 
suspected. The red color was due to nothing more 
serious than ripe tomatoes which anyone might have 
seen had they looked well. 

The normal odor of the gastric contents 
Odor. is acid. In disease, it may be "beefy" 

from the presence of blood ; putrid in can- 
cer or dilation; ammoniacal in uraemia. In stercora- 
ceous vomiting it has the characteristic odor of the 
stools. 

Measure or gauge as accurately as pos- 
QuANTiiY. sible the quantity vomited. The normal 

stomach has a capacity of three pints, an 
amoimt which may be increased in dilatation to three 
or more quarts. The quantity vomited also furnishes 
important information as to the absorptive and diges- 
tive powers of the stomach, especially when considered 
in connection with the amount and kind of food in- 
gested. To obtain the latter data, physicians are in the 
habit of giving a measured quantity of food (test-meal), 
and within an hour withdrawing it with a stomach- 
tube for examination. 

Test-meals are given either in the morning i 
Test-meals, or at noon, and, depending upon the time ' 

given, are called respectively test-breakfast 
or test-dinner. The most common test-meal is the 
breakfast. Two breakfast formulae are in common use, 



SECRETIONS AND EXCRETIONS. 235 

which are named after their originators, Ewald and 

Boas. 

Test-break- Consists of from 35 to 70 grams (2 ounces) 

FAST OF of wheat bread, and of 300 to 400 cu. cm. 

Ewald AND (ij to 2 glasses) of water, or weak tea 

Boas. without sugar. 

Consists of oatmeal soup, prepared by 
Test-break- boiling down to 500 cu. cm. (17 fluid 
FAST OF Boas, ounces) one liter (quart) of water to which 

one tablespoonful of rolled oats has been 
added. A little salt may be added, but nothing more. 

Soup 400 cu. cm. (2 glasses), beefsteak 
Test-dinner 200 grams (7 oimces), wheat bread 50 
or Riegel. grams (if oxmces), water 200 cu. cm. (i 

glass). Finely chopped meat may be sub- 
stituted for the beefsteak. 

Besides the contents already mentioned 
Ingredients, above, the vomit always contains more 

or less mucus and saliva. Food in all 
stages of digestion will be noticed, and, if present, the 
segments (proglottides) of tape-worms, the adult round 
worm (ascaris lumbricoides), and the thread-like 
trichinae. Foreign indigestible objects, which have 
been swallowed, may be discovered, such as pins, 
needles, whistles, etc. These are found most often in 
the vomit of children, the insane, and in hysterical 
subjects. In the last class of patients the most rigid 
surveillance must be practised to prevent deception. 



236 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

From an examination of the blood alone, 
Blood the diagnosis of a limited number of dis- 

Specimens. eases can often be made. In a few, as 

for example malaria, the agents of the dis- 
ease can be detected with the microscope in properly 
prepared specimens; in others, e.g., typhoid fever, 
when a drop of blood is brought in contact with known 
typhoid bacilli, a characteristic phenomenon, WidoFs 
reaction, takes place, which consists in a clumping or 
drawing together of the bacilli ; in still another class of 
diseases, the diagnosis is made by determming the 
mmiber of red and white corpuscles present in one 
cubic centimeter of blood, and noting in what respects 
their number and appearance dijffer from that which is 
normal. In cities maintaining mxmicipal labora- 
tories, outfits for the collection of specimens of blood 
for the diagnosis of both malaria and typhoid fever are 
supplied. 

This outfit for typhoid fever consists of 
Typhoid either a slip of unglazed paper, a glass 
Fever slide, or a metal plate, upon which the 
(Widal) blood is to be collected, and a needle for 
OuTFrr. puncturing the ear or finger. These with 
the directions for taking the blood are 
enclosed in an envelope. 

The directions for taking the blood-drop on paper 
are as follows: 
"Thoroughly cleanse the skin of the patient^s finger- 






SECRETIONS AND EXCRETIONS. 



237 



tip or the lobe of the ear. After carefully drying, prick 
it with a needle previously sterilized by heating over a 
lamp or gas flame and allowed to cool. Allow five or 
more large drops of blood to dry on the inner surface of 
a piece of paper. Replace the folded paper in the en- 
velope, and return to the laboratory. " Where a glass 
slide or a thin sheet of metal is used in place of the 





A B 

Fig. 29. — ^Application of the Serum-reaction to Typhoid Bacilli. (Williams.) 
A, shows the distribution of the badlli before the reaction. B, shows clump- 
ing of the motionless bacilli after mixture with the serum of a case of typhoid 
fever. (Diagrammatic.) 

paper, the directions for the collection of the blood 
specimens do not differ materially from the above. 

As a rule the Widal reaction is not given by the blood 
in typhoid fever before the sixth or seventh day, and 
sometimes not until almost the end of the sickness ; for 
this reason it is advisable to prepare a second specimen 
of the blood after a few days in case the first specimen 



238 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

proves negative. In about five per cent of the cases the 
reaction is never obtained during the whole course of 
the disease, a fact, it would appear from recent studies, 
due to the presence, as causative factor in the disease, 
of another bacterium, the para-colon bacillus. Blood 
from such a case when tested with a para-colon bacillus, 
gives the characteristic reaction. 

For the detection of the malarial parasites 
Malaria, either glass slides or cover-glasses are used, 

the former being given the preference by the 
majority of municipal laboratories. The directions for 
preparing specimens of blood in suspected malarial 
fever as given by the New York Health Department, 
are as follows: 

"Wash two glass slides with alcohol, and wipe with 
a soft, clean linen cloth (not a soiled handkerchief) 
until clean and shiny. On cold, damp days the slide 
should be warmed over a flame. After cleaning, the 
slides must be held by the sides (F F in diagram), and 
surfaces and ends not touched. Clean the patient's 
ear-lobe with alcohol and prick the skin with a sterile, 
surgical needle or a small pointed scalpel, so as to act- 
ually incise the capillaries. The blood should not be 
squeezed out, but should flow freely. Wiping oflf the 
first few drops, the third or fourth drop should be 
quickly (before it gets much larger than a pin head) 
taken up on the edge of one end of one slide. Place 
this edge on the surface of the other slide, as indicated 



SECRETIONS AND EXCRETIONS. 



239 



in the diagram, and as soon as the blood-drop has 
spread along the line of contact, draw the upper slide 
gently along the surface of the lower, thus spreading 
the blood in a thin film. Dry this by waving in the air. 
Do not heat. Repeat the process, using the edge of 
the prepared slide to spread the blood upon the other 
slide. The blood should be taken before quinine has 
been administered, as quinine quickly expels most of the 
malarial parasites of this latitude from the capillary 
blood. Under such circumstances negative reports 






Fig. 30. 

count for little or nothing. The blood should be drawn 
just before^ during, or just after the supposed malarial 
paroxysm, as the parasite is present in the capillaries 
in much greater numbers at those times. " 

When cover-glasses are preferred, two or more cover- 
glasses are cleansed in precisely the same way as 
described for slides. A small drop of blood is caught in 
the center of one cover-glass by bringing the latter in 
contact with the former. Then the second cover-glass 
is allowed to fall gently upon the other. If the glasses 
have been well cleansed, the blood will immediately 



240 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

spread in a thin layer between them, when they are at 
once separated by gently drawing one over the other 
in the same plane, i.e., parallel to the other. 

If an examination of the red and white 
Specimen FOR elements of the blood is to be made, blood 
Corpuscular gj^g are prepared upon slides or cover- 

EXAMINA- . ^1. J 'U ^ t 

^jQjj glasses m the same way as described for 

malaria. 




Fig. 31. — Cover-glass is touched to summit of a drop of blood and 
then allowed to fall on a second cover-glass, margins overlapping. 
Method of separating cover-glasses. (Clinical Diagnosis, Boston.) 

The microscopical examination of purulent 
Pus AND or other discharges often permits of the 
OTHER immediate discovery of the agents causing 

Discharges, a disease, a fact which may be of incalcul- 
able benefit to the patient, and a sure guide 
for the doctor. This is the case, for example, in puru- 
lent ophthalmia, a suppurative conjunctivitis most fre- 
quently observed in the new-bom, although also found 



I 




SECRETIONS AND EXCRETIONS. 341 

in adults, and which if not recognized speedily leads 

to permanent blindness. Specimens of such discharges 

are collected upon slides 

or cover-glasses in the 

same way as described for 

malaria, care being eser- « 

cised that the smears are 

not too thick. In making 

smears in this class of 

cases, it is safest, on ac- 1 

coxmt of the dai^er of 

self-infection, to use an 

object easily destroyed, as 

for example a tooth-pick, 

which is then burned. 

No secretion during sickness is subject to 
Urme. closer scrutiny than the urine. It is the 

chief avenue for the elimination of nitro- 
gen from the body, as well as for other substances which, 
if retained, are distinctly hannful. In many diseases it 
is the channel of exit for the specific bacteria from the 
body. Such highly significant data bearing upon a pa- 
tient's illness are obtained from a study of the urine, 
that the precise condition of this secretion is always as- 
certained. 

Normal urine, when freshly voided, should 
CoLoa. be perfectly clear or faintly cloudy. Its 

color is variable, verging from a light yellow 
16 



242 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

or straw, to a brownish-red. The color of all urines 
deepens upon standing, while at the same time a doud 
forms which gradually sinks to the bottom of the vessd 
which contains it. Urines which are allowed to get 
chilled are often quite cloudy or opaque, and when pre- 
senting this appearance are sometimes taken to indi- 
cate an abnormality in the secretion. Opacity from 
this cause is quickly dissipated on the application of 
heat. 

Pathological urines exhibit the same variations in 
shades as the normal. The color of all urines is sub- 
ject to seasonal variation, being pale in winter and dark 
in summer. A pale urine simply indicates an excess of 
water. The color of urine is also influenced by the 
food ingested. 

Urines are described as: 

(i) Pale or straw color. 

(2) Amber. 

(3) Reddish-yeUow or red (high color). 

(4) Reddish-brown (dark urine). 

Besides these shades the urine may be green from 
bile, red from blood, black from melanin, blue from 
indican or after the ingestion of methylene blue, yellow 
from santonin or rheum, and milk-like from the presence 
of pus or chyle (chyluria). In filariasis, the urine may 
contain both chyle and blood, a condition to which the 
name hcBmatochyluria has been given. 



SECRETIONS AND EXCRETIONS. 243 

Bile imparts to urine a yellow or greenish- 
BiLE. brown color, and can usually be detected 

at once upon inspection. If a urine con- 
taining bile be shaken, the foam which collects upon the 
top will be found of a yellowish or greenish hue even 
when these colors are not pronounced in the body of the 
urine. The same urine when filtered also leaves a 
greenish stain upon the filter-paper. 

Five to ten cubic centimeters of urine are 

placed in a test-tube and treated with two 

Smith's Test 

^ to three cubic centimeters of tincture of 

'°'' ^"" iodine (which has been diluted with alcohol 

in the proportion of one to ten) in such 
manner that the iodine solution forms a layer above the 
urine. In the presence of bile, a distinct emerald- 
green ring is seen at the zone of contact. 

Blood gives urine a color which may vary 
Blood, from bright red to dark brown. Such 
urine turns darker upon standing. In 
cases in which blood is voided, it is important that the 
urine of a single micturition be passed in two or three 
portions. A person voiding urine mixed with blood 
is said to suffer from hcematuria. When the blood is 
dissolved in the urine, i.e., the haemoglobin has left the 
corpuscles, the condition is called, fuBtnoglobinuria. 
Sometimes it is difl&cult to distinguish blood from bile in 
urine, as both may present the same appearance. They 
can usually be distinguished by dilution with water 



344 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

which ax:ts so as to bring the red color of the blood more 
prominently into view. 

Urine containing pus, when allowed to 

Pus. stand a short time, exhibits a heavy white or 

creamy precipitate. If shaken or poured 

out, it is seen to be tenacious or stringy. Pus is often 

associated with blood in the urine. 

Salol is so frequently prescribed, that 

Green attention is directed to the fact that urine 

Urine, voided by a patient taking it becomes green 

and eventually black upon standing. 

The quantity voided in the twenty-four 

Quantity, hours is subject to great variations, usually 

bearing a relation to the quantity of fluids 
ingested. Exercise, sleep, temperature, atmospheric 
moisture, all influence the urinary secretion. 

An adult ordinarily voids between twelve hundred 
and fifteen hundered cubic centimeters (thirty-five to 
fifty ounces) of urine in the twenty-four hours. Most 
individuals do not void urine after retiring; and if this 
has been the rule, a departure from this habit should be 
viewed with suspicion. 

Polyuria is the condition in which imusually 
Polyuria, large amounts of urine are passed in the 

twenty-four hours. An extreme grade of 
polyuria is common in diabetes; and in that form in 
which sugar is also present (diabetes mellitus), twenty- 
five or more liters (quarts) is not very unusual. 



SECRETIONS AND EXCRETIONS. 



24S 



Oliguria is that condition in which amounts 
Oliguria, of urine below the average are passed. 

Usually it is a very serious symptom; how- 
ever, it is occasionally seen in neurasthenics. 

The odor of urine is of slight significance. 
Odor. The normal odor is described as like that 

of ''bouillon," "oysters," or "new hay." 
Uriniferous, as applied to urine, describes its odor after 
decomposition has taken place. Freshly voided urines 
which are uriniferous are pathological. 

The specific gravity of the urine is deter- 
Specific mined with an instrument called a urin- 
Gravtty. ometer. With the urinometer is supplied 

a cylindrical vessel which is to hold the 
urine while the specific gravity is be- 
ing taken. To determine the specific 
gravity the cylinder is nearly filled 
with urine, when the urinometer is 
slowly introduced. The specific 
gravity is read directly from the 
scale at the upper end of the in- 
strument where the surface of the 
urine meets a division on the scale. ^ o- i tt • 

Fig. 33. — Simple Urin- 
A sample of the twenty-four hours' ometer and Accessories. 

output should be employed. "^^^ 

Normally the specific gravity varies between loio 
and 1025; pathologically, between 1002 and 1060. 
Urines containing albumin have their specific gravities 





246 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

between 1005 and loio; those containing sugar, between 
1030 and 1040. To be sure, these limits are often 
exceeded or diminished. 

The reaction of normal urine is acid, 
Reaction, although specimens passed at different 

times may be neutral. The reaction of a 
urine is obtained by wetting pieces of filter-paper whidi 
have been colored red or blue by saturation with red or 
blue litmus. If a urine be acid it will impart to the blue 
paper a red color; if alkaline, the red paper will be 
changed to blue. Normal urines sometimes alter the 
color of both papers slightly; such urines are said to be 
amphoteric. The latter is of no significance. 

Albumin in urine is always an indication of 
Albumin, disease. Tests for its presence should be 

made as a routine procedure. 

To determine the presence of albumin, 

Nitric (i) fill a test-tube two-thirds full of urine 

Acid Test, and apply gentle heat to the upper surface 

until it begins to boil. Now add a few 
drops of concentrated nitric or acetic acid. Should the 
urine remain clear it is free from albumin; if cloudy 1 
upon boiling, and the cloud does not clear up up>on the | 
addition of the acid, it contains albumin. ; 

(2) Add a few cubic centimeters of con- 

CoNTACT centrated nitric acid to a test-tube and, 

Test. while inclining the tube at an angle of 

about forty-five degrees, with a pipette let 



SECRETIONS AND EXCRETIONS. 247 

a few cubic centimeters of urine flow down the sides of 
the tube so that it floats upon the acid. Hold the tube 
straight and to the light, when if albumin be present a 
white ring will be seen at the junction of the two 
fluids. 

Caution : Filter the urine before applying any test for 
albumin. 

The presence of sugar in urine is deter- 

mined by heating a few cubic centimeters 

of Hain's solution in a test-tube, and then 

immediately, upon removal from the flame, 

adding a few drops of the suspected urine. If sugar 

is present the blue color of the solution will be changed to 

a canary or reddish yellow. Always boil and filter 

urines containing albumin before applying the test for 

sugar. 

Bacteria, and the eggs of animal parasites, 
Foreign are also at various times eliminated in the 
Substances, urine. But as this phase of the subject 

is treated in detail in another chapter, 
reference is made to it here for the sake of completeness 
only. 

At times, however, other things are voided in the urine 
which should be spoken of in this place. Reference 
is made to gravel and stones from the kidneys or blad- 
der, hair from dermoid cysts, fecal matter (in vesico- 
rectal fistula), etc. In hysterical subjects and the 
insane, hairs, beans, fish-bones, etc., may be actually 



348 INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

voided, or be passed oflF on the physician as having 
been voided. Where the objects axe really passed 
in the urine, they are introduced into the urethra or 
bladder before micturition. Hair, however, may be 
passed in the urine in cases of dermoid C3^ts of the 
bladder. 

When preparing a specimen for examina- 
CoLLECTioN tion, a portion of the full twenty-four hours' 
OF Specimen, secretion should be chosen. Although 

this does not always furnish the inost 
satisfactory sample, it is the safest rule to follow in the 
absence of specific instructions. In one form of Bright's 
disease, for example, albumin is present only an hour 
or two after meals, and then in very small amounts, 
so that the examination of a twenty-four hours' mixture 
might not reveal its presence. In like maimer, in 
diseases of the genito-urinary organs, the twenty-four 
hours' secretion does not give as much information as 
one or several specimens collected during a single act 
of micturition; and in affections of these parts the 
patient is directed to divide his urine while voiding it 
into two or three portions. If possible always send 
at least four ounces of urine for examination. Unless 
the urine can be examined in a few hours, keep it in a 
cool place; or add to it gr. v of boracic acid, or one 
dram of chloroform, to every four ounces of urine. 
Formalin, m. i to four ounces, is also an excellent 
preservative. 



i SECRETIONS AND EXCRETIONS. 249 

[ The observations to be made of the stools 

Feces. include the number, amount, consistence, 

form, color, and odor of the movements, and 
further, the presence or absence of mucus, blood, pus, gas 
bubbles (which denote fermentation), animal parasites 
(e.g., worms or segments of same), foreign bodies (e.g., 
pins, coins, etc.), gall-stones, and undigested food 
particles. When blood, pus or mucus is discovered, 
its relation to the rest of the movement should be noted, 
that is to say, whether the same is mixed with the 
stool, clings to it, or is passed separately before or after. 

Normally the number of stools in different in- 
NuMBER. di viduals is subject to great variations, so that 

it is impossible to fix a standard which will ap- 
ply to every one. Thus, while it is usual for the majority 
of persons to have at least one movement in the twenty- 
four hours, it is not uncommon to find some who exceed 
this number by one or two stools, and still others for 
whom one stool in two or three days is apparently 
normal. Wide variations in the number of stools is 
compatible with good health. For the average person, 
however, at least one movement daily is requisite; less 
than this number constitutes constipation, and more, 
several loose movements, diarrhoea. Both constipation 
and diarrhoea are important symptoms not only in 
diseases of the alimentary tract, but of s)rstemic aflfec- 
tions as well, and the history of no case is complete 
without a record of the state of the bowels. 



2SO INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

The amount of fecal matter does not vary 
Amount, so much as the number of stools, since 

the greater the nimiber, the smaller the 
individual movements, and vice versa. The size of the 
stool bears a relation to the kinds of food eaten, a diet 
rich in vegetables and starchy foods leaving a much 
larger residue than one rich in animal proteids. 

The consistence of a stool depends upon 
Consistence, the amount of water present. In health 

the food determines the amount of the 
latter, being greater with a vegetable than a proteid 
diet. 

Stools are described in regard to their consistency as 
thin, mushy, or watery; and hard and dry (scybalous). 

The color of a stool varies with the charac- 
CoLOR. ter of the food ingested. It may be quite 

light, as in a person restricted to a milk 
diet ; green from green vegetables ; and black from a diet 
containing an abundance of rare or raw meat. All 
stools turn darker upon exposure to light. In disease 
the stools may be golden, yellowish-green, or green, 
from bile; pasty and greyish or white, in diseases 
of the liver or bile passages ; red, brownish-red, coflFee- 
colored, or black (tarry) from blood; dark blue from the 
administration of methylene blue. Calomel turns the 
stool green. The number of stools also has a bearing 
upon their color, the larger the number, the lighter the 
color of the individual movements. 



SECRETIONS AND EXCRETIONS. 251 

Examinations of the stools are frequently 
advisable for the purpose of discovering, 
if possible, gall-stones, animal parasites, 
and eggs of parasites. 

If gall-stones, worms, or any other abnor- 
^ mal constituent is to be sought in the stools, 

STONES, JliTC 

the following procedure is advisable: 
(i) Have stools for twenty-four or forty-eight hours 
passed into a large vessel. 

(2) Mix each stool with about a gallon of water and 
stir thoroughly; let stand for one-half hour and then 
carefully pour oflF most of the fluid. 

(3) Add more water and mix as before. 

(4) Cover another vessel with surgeon's lint, fastening 
same with cord or adhesive plaster, and pour the mix- 
ture upon the gauze. 

In the detritus left upon the gauze, search for gall- 
stones, parasites, or any other foreign object. In place 
of the lint, a fine sieve may be used with which to strain 
the mixture. Gall-stones vary in size from a grain of 
sand to an olive and larger, and are usually of a brown- 
ish-green color. They may crumple to the (ouch, or 
be quite hard. Often they show the typical smooth 
facets on one or more sides. The appearance of para- 
sites and the kinds usually encountered, are described 
in the chapter devoted to parasites. 

For microscopical examination the feces should be 
passed into a warmed vessel and sent to a laboratory 



asa INFECTIOUS AND PARASITIC DISEASES. 

at once; or in case this is not feasible, a small portion 
should be poured into a wide-mouthed bottle, and while 
en route to the examiner kept warm. 

Parasites may be preserved for longer periods in 
either weakened alcohol or whisky. Gall-stones should 
be placed in a tightly stoppered bottle to prevent deteri- 
oration. 



APPENDIX 



WEIGHTS AND MEASURES. 

1. English. 

I grain (gr.) 

I ounce (oz.) =437-5 grains. 

I pound (lb.) =i6 ounces=7ooo grains. 

I minim =.91146 grain. 

I fluidram =60 minims. 

I fluidoimce =8 flnidrams. 

I pint =20 fluidomices. 

I gallon =8 pints. 

2. Relations of English and Metric Systems. 

I grain =64.8 milligrams. 

I oimce =28.3 grams. 

I poimd =453.6 grams. 

I gram =15.432 grains. 

I kilo =2 pounds 3 oimces. 

I minim =0.059 cubic centimeter. 

I fluidram =3.5 cubic centimeters. 

I fluidounce =28.39 cubic centimeters 

I pint =567.9 cubic centimeters. 

I cu. cm =16.9 minims. 

I liter =35.2 fluidoimces. 

I inch =2.54 centimeters. 

I foot. =30.48 centimeters. 

I yard =91.44 centimeters. 

I centimeter =0.39 inch. 

I meter =39«37 inches. 

253 



2S4 













APPENDIX. 






TUERMOMETRIC 


EQUIVALENTS. 




raiGRAI 


)E Fahrenheit 


Centigrade FAHUENHm 


IIO 


230 


38 


1004 


lOO 


212 


37-S 


99.9 


95 


203 


37 


98.6 


90 


194 


36.S 


97-7 


8S 


i8S 


36 


96.8 


80 


176 


35.5 


9S-9 


75 


167 


35 


95 


70 


158 


34 


93-2 


6S. 


149 


33 


914 


60 


140 


32 


89.6 


ss 


131 


31 


87.8 


so 


122 


30 


86 


45 


"3 


25 


77 


44 


III. 2 


20 


68 


43 


109.4 


IS 


59 


42 


107.6 


10 


SO 


41 


105.8 


+ s 


41 


40.S 


104.9 





32 


40 


104.0 


- s 


23 


39-5 


103.1 


— 10 


14 


39 


102.2 


-15 


+ 5 


38.5 


101.3 


—20 


- 4 



Formulae for converting degrees of Fahrenheit into Centigrade 
and vice versa. 

F. = Fahrenheit ; C. = Centigrade ; D. = degrees. 
Fahrenheit into Centigrade 

(F.~32<^)X|=C. 
Example: 140° F.= 140-32 X|=6o° C. 
Centigrade into Fahrenheit 

(C.X|)+32=F. 
Example: 10° C.=ioX|+32=5o° F. 



INDEX. 



Abscess, amoebic, 107, 112; for- 
mation of, 106, 107; from bot- 
fly, 142; from flea, 144 

Actinomycosis, epitome of, 184 

Adolescence, typhoid fever and 
tuberculosis in, 97 

Age, influence on disease, 94-98 

.^glutination, 27; agglutinins in, 
27 

Ague, 198, 199 

Albumin, tests for, in urine, 246 

Amoebic dysentery, 112 

Antibodies, 25, 99 

Antiseptics, definition of, 57; 
sugar and salt, 58 

Antitoxin, 25, 30 

Anthrax, epitome, 185 

Armed tape-worm, 137 

Arsenical poisoning, 4 

Ascaris lumbricoides, 124 

Asiatic cholera, temperature in, 

Asiatic lung fluke, 130 

Bacilli, 44 

Bacilluria, 160 

Bacteria, 38; aerobic and anaero- 
bic, 56; agents harmful to, 57; 
air, 49; arts and industries, 
39; in complications, 32; dis- 
tribution, 45-50; in dust, 47, 



48; effect on, drying, light, 
ozone, heat, etc., 60-63; ^^^*s 
from body, 152; expectoration 
and nasal secretions, 155; fac- 
tors necessary for growth, 53- 
57; in feces, 156; forms of, 43; 
grouping, 44; ground, 47; in 
inflammations, 105; multipli- 
cation, 42; pathogenic and 
non-pathogenic, 41; shape, 43; 
size, 42; ^in, exit from, 161; 
specific and non-specific, 51; 
spores, 52; suppurations, exit 
in, 164; theraaal death-point, 
217; in urine, 160; virulent 
and non- virulent, 41; vomit, 
156; in water, 48 

Bacteriaemias, 20 

Bactericidal, 27 

Bacteriol3rsins, 27 

Balsam Peru, specific in itch, 148 

Bed-bugs, 144 

Bichloride of mercury, 221 

Bilharziosis, 132 

Black death (see bubonic plague) 

Bladder-worms, 135 

Blood, examination of, 236; for 
malaria, 238; for typhoid fever, 
236; exit for infectious agents, 
162 

Boas, test-breakfast, 235 



^SS 



2S6 



INDEX. 



\ 



Bot-flies, 142, 143 
Break-bone fever (see dengue) 
Bubonic plague, epitome, 186, 

187 

Carbolic add, disinfectant, 222 
Cestodes, 133 
Chemotaxis, 103 
Chicken-pox, epitome, 188 
Childhood, diseases of, 96 
Cholera, epitome, 189 
Climate, a predisposing cause, 81 
Coccidium hominis, 11 1 
Cold-storage, danger of, 179 
Combined uoiections, 22 
Communicable, 37 
Complications, 32 
Compsomyia macellaria, 143 
Congenital infections, 182 
Contagious, 36 
"Core," of abscess, 107 
Cover-glass preparations, 240 
Craw-craw, filaria in, 120 
Creeping eruption, 173 
Crisis, 18 

Cryptogenic infections, 183 
Cysticerci, 135; cysticercus cellu- 
losa, 139 

Defensive mechanism, dual ac- 
tion of, 100 
Dengue, epitome, 190 
Deodorant, definition, 57 
Dermatobia cyaniventris, 143 ; 

noxialis, 142 
Dibothriocephalus latus, 137 
Diphtheria cultures, 230 ; epit- 
ome, 190, 191 
Disease, agents of, 3; infections, 



68; evolution of, 34; predis- 
posing causes, 74; defensive 
mechanism in, 2 

Disinfection and disinfectants, 
214; definition, 57; bichloride 
of mercury, 221; chlorinated 
lime, 224; carbolic add, 222; 
fonnalin, 222; heat, 216, 217; 
lime, 224; solutol, sdveol, 
l3rsol, 223; tricresol, 223 

Distomiasis, 132 

Dipylidium canintun, 138 

Divers' paral3rsis, 4 

Dum-Diun fever, 113 

Dwarf tape-worm, 138 

Dysentery, amoebic, 192; baciD- 
ary, 192 

Echinococcus disease, 140 
Egyptian hematuria, 132; oph- 
thalmia, II 
Elephantiasis, filaria in, 119 
Epidemic cerebro-spinal menin- 
gitis, epitome, 188 
Erysipdas, epitome, 193 
Evolution, in disease, 34 
Ewald and Boas, test-breakfast, 

235 

Fasciciola hepatica, 132 

Feces, exit for bacteria and para- 
sites, 159; examination of, 249; 
gall-stones in, 251 

Filaria Loa, 120; method of ex- 
traction, 121 

Filaria sanguinis hominis, 118 

Flat-worms, 129 

Flea (pulex irritans), 144; sand- 
flea (sarcopsylla penetrans), 



1 



INDEX. 



257 



' 144; host of dog tape-worm, 

Flukes, 129 

Food, danger of infection from, 

17s 
Formalin, 222 

Gall-stones, in stools, 251 

Genito-urinaiy tract, infections 
of, 181 

Germicide, see disinfectant 

Glanders, epitome, 194 

Gonorrhoea, epitome, 195; infec- 
tions in infants, 95, 96 

Guinea-worm, 116; Soudanese 
method of extraction, 118 

Hsmatochyluria, due to filaria, 

120 
Haematuria, 243 
Hemoglobinuria, 243 
Harvest-mite (Leptus autum- 

nalis, 149 
Health, definition of, i 
Hip-joint disease, 97 
Hook-worm, 126 
Host, flea, of dog tape-worm, 138 
Human fertilizer, danger of, 176 
Hydrophobia, epitome, 196 
Hymenolepsis Nana, 138 

Infancy, diseases of, 95 
Immunity, opsonin in, 28 
Infectious agents, action, 7; def- 
inition, 6, 7; specific and non- 
specific, 9 
Infection and infectious disease, 
12; combined, 22; contracted 
through air or food, 175; con- 

17 



veyance by insects, 72; crisis 
in, 18; family in, 79; general, 
19; heredity in, 76; inocula- 
bility, 167; latent period, 14; 
lysis, 18; mixed, 71; number 
of bacteria in, 68; portal of 
entry in, 69; relation of body 
to, 73; race, 76; secondary, 
2^^ seU-limiting nature of, 24; 
specific and non-specific, 10; 
symbiosis in, 71; toxins in, 14; 
terminal, 34; virulence of bac- 
teria in, 70 

Inflammation, definition, 99, 100; 
cardinal symptoms, loi 

Influenza, epitome, 197 

Insontiimi, 181 

Itch-mite, 148 

Intermittent fever, see malaria 

Insecticides, definition, 59 

Insects, parasitic of skm, 173; 
role in disease, 86-90 

Ixodiasis (tick-fever), 150 

Jews, immunity of, 77 
Jigger-flea, 144 

La Grippe, see influenza 

Latent period, 14 

Leprosy, epitome, 197 

Leucocytes, 102 

Leucoq^osis, 104 

Lice, head, 146; pubic, 147; 

clothes, 147 
Light, effect on bacteria, 56 
Lime, milk of, 224; chlorinated, 

224 
Liver, influence of tropics on, 84 
Liver fluke, Chinese, 131 



aS8 



INDEX. 



Liver-rot, cause of, 132 
Lock-jaw (see tetanus) 
Lues (see syphilis) 
Lysis, 18 

Madura foot, epitome, 198 

Malarial fever, epitome, 198, 199; 
Plasmodium of, 113-115; ter- 
tian and quartan. 115 

Measles, epitome, 119; in Faroe 
and Fiji Islands, 78 

Measles, German (see rubella). 

Measles, due to embryo tape- 
worms, 139 

Membranous croup (see diph- 
theria) 

Metabolism, 35 

Metastasis, in infections, 33 

Metchnikoff, theory of phagocy- 
tosis, 28, 103 

Micrococci, 44 

Milk, danger of, 178 

Mosquitoes, in filariasis, 120; 
malaria, 73, 116; yellow fever, 
72 

Mumps, epitome, 200 

Mountain-climber's disease, 3 

Mouth, portal of entry, 174 

Myiasis, 141 

Napoleon, sufferer from itch, 148 
Necrobiosis, 106 

Occupation, predisposing to in- 
fections, 92-94; mortality table, 

92 
Old age, pneumonia in, 97 

Ophthalmia neonatorum (see 

gonorrhoea) 



Opisthorchis sinensis, 131 

Opsonin, 27 

Organism, 6 

Osier, prophylaxis in typhoid 

fever, 211 
Oxygen, relation of, to bacteria, 

SS 
Oxyuns vennicularis, 125 

Painters' colic, 4 

Parasite, definition, 8; kinds, 109; 
cycle of development, no 

Parasites, exits from body, 152; 
expectoration, 156; skin, 162, 
173; suppurations, 165; feces, 
159; urine, 161; vomit, 156 

Parasitic flies, 141 

Parasitic h£mopt3rsis, 130 

Paragonimus Westermanii, 130 

Phagocytosis, 104; opsonin in, 38 

Pin worm, 125 

Pneumonia, epitome, 200; as sec- 
ondary infection, 2^ 

Pott's disease, 97 

Predisposition, 74; age, 94; in- 
fluence of region, climate, 81; 
individual, 80; inherited and 
acquired, 80; family, 79; phys- 
ical conditions of country, 85; 
occupation, 92 

Proglottides, of tape-worm, 134 

Protozoa, 6, in 

Ptomain poisoning, 4 

Pus, 107 

Pyaemia, 21 

Pyogenic bacteria, 107; in infec- 
tions of childhood, 97 

Quick consumption, 21 



INDEX. 



259 



Relapsing fever, epitome, 201 
Riegel, test-dinner, 235 
Round-worm, 124 
Rubella, epitome, 202 

Saprophytes, 40 

Sarcophaga Camaria, 143 

Scarlet fever, epitome, 202; ten- 
acity of virus, 155 

Schistosomum haematobiimi, 132 

Screw worm, 143 

Season, influence on predisposi- 
tion, 90 

Secondary infections, 23 

Septicaemia, 20 

Skin, exit for bacteria, 161 ; portal 
of entry, 173 

Sleeping sickness, 113 

SnaU, host of Bilharzia haema- 
tobiimi, 133 

Small-pox, epitome, 203, 204 

Spirilla, 44 

Spores, 52; disinfection of, 218 

Sputum,|examinationof, 226-229; 
exit for bacteria and parasites, 
156; collection of, 229; mum- 
mular, 228 

Staphylococci, 45 

Stegomyia fasciata, in yellow 
fever, 89 

Stomatitis (epidemic), epitome, 
205 

Sterilization, definition, 57 

Streptococci, 45 

Strongyloides intestinalis, 122 

Sugar, test for, in urine, 247 

Suppuration, 106; exit for infec- 
tious and parasitic agents, 164 

Syphilis, epitome of, 206 



Taenia saginata, 136; taenia sol- 
ium, 136 

Tape-worms, 133; beef, 136; 
dwarf, 138; dog, 138; fish, 
137; pork, 136; segments in 
vomit, 156 

Temperature, effect on bacteria, 

55 
Terminal infections, 34 

Test-meak, 234 

Tetanus, epitome, 207 

Thread-worm, 125 

Tick-fever, 150 

Toxaemias, 20 

Toxins, 14, 20 

Trematodes, 129 

Treponema (spirochaeta) palli- 
dimi, II 

Trichinella spiralis, 122 

Trichiniasis, 122 

Tricresol, 223 

Tropics, predisposing influence, 
81-86 

Trypanosomiasis, 113 

Tuberculosis, epitome, 208; in 
children, 80; among Jews, 78; 
negro, 78; North American 
Indian, 78; as secondary in- 
fection, 23 

Typhoid fever, epitome, 209- 
212; without intestinal lesions, 
170 

Ultra-microscopic, 11 

Undnariaduodenalis, 126; Amer- 
icana, 127 

Urine, albumen, tests for, 246; 
bile. Smith's test, 243; collec- 
tion, 248; examination, 241; 



36o 



INDEX. 



sped6c grayityi 245; sugar 
test, 247; tjrphoid baalli in, 160 

Variola (see small-poz) 
Vomiti occurrence, 232; exami- 
nation, 233-235 

Water-borne diseases, 49 
Whip-worm, 121 



Whooping-cough, epitome, 213 
Widal reaction, 236 
Wood-tick, 149 

Wool-sorter's disease (see an- 
thrax) 

Yellow fever, early methods of 
disinfection, 168; epitome, 312; 
U. S. Army conunission, 163 



1,:^ i 






ii 



I' '!■ 

I- Ml 



I :i 



I.; 



SI I ,li 



l>ltll 

11 " 



; 



; 'i 



il 



it 



I 



\4^ 



I > 



inniiiiiiiiiin 

3 2044 048 093 884 



This book should be returned to 
the Library on or before the last date 
stamped below. 

A fine of five cents a day is incurred 
by retaining it beyond the specified 
time. 

Please return promptly.